Marketing

9 Marketing

Setting Up Offer Information

Topics in this part: The following topics describe how to set up and change offer information:

Introducing Offer and Source Codes provides an overview of the steps you need to follow and the basic information you need to set up an offer.
Working with Offers (WOFR)describes how to create and change offer information, set up free gifts, freight charges, service charges, and discounts for an offer.
Working with Season Codes (WSEA) describes how to create and change season information.
Working with Promotions (WPRO) describes how to create and change promotion value information, which is used in Source Code reporting.
Working with Source Categories (WSCT) describes how to create and change source categories, which are used for source code reporting.
Working with Source Codes (WSRC) describes how to create and change source code information, review source code history, set up free gifts, freight charges, service charges, and discounts for a source code.
Working with Dollar Chart by Offer (WDCO) describes how to establish dollar discounts by offer.
Working with Dollar Chart by Source Code (WDCS) describes how to establish dollar discounts by source code.
Initializing an Offer (MOFI) describes how to save and then delete order history for an offer, and transfer data from one offer to another.
Working with Special Pricing by Source Code (WSPP) describes how to define special price breaks for multiple items and/or source code quickly.
Generating Source Codes Using the Source Upload Table (WSRW) explains how to create an Order Administration source code using information from the Source Code Work file.

Introducing Offer and Source Codes

Purpose: This topic contains a brief overview of the offer and source code tables, including how to select them and set them up. The offer and source code tables must be set up before you can set up pricing information.

A reporting hierarchy showing the relationship between offers, source codes, and other Marketing tables is presented at the end of this topic.

You need to create a record for every offer (catalog, space ad, TV ad) for which you accept orders. Information for each field on the offer record is not provided here. Only information that you may need from other tables in order to set up an offer is presented here.

Setting up Offers

	Use in	Related Menu Option
Season codes	produce reporting and analysis by season	Working with Season Codes (WSEA)
Additional charge codes	add service charges defined in the offer or with Working with Dollar Chart by Offer (WDCO)	Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC)
Currency	required if you process orders in multiple currencies (the Multi Currency by Offer (E03) system control value selected).	Working with Currency (WCUR)

Other information that you can add using the Work with Offers function includes:

Free gift items
Freight by dollar chart
Flat freight by offer (set the source code freight method to F, flat rate by ship-to)
Service charges by dollar chart
Dollar discounts

Setting up Source Codes

You need to create source codes for all of the offers that generate orders. Source codes control the pricing and freight methods used on the order.

Information for each field on the source code record is not provided here. Only included is information that you may need from other tables in order to set up a source code, or information that needs to be set up in other tables in order for some feature to work. For example, all pricing methods are not discussed -- only those that send you to another table.

See Working with Source Codes (WSRC).

Divisions

You can create your divisions before you set up source codes (Working with Divisions (WDIV)) or while you are using Working with Source Codes (WSRC). You click on the arrow in the Division field and when the Select Division pop-up window displays you can select Create to create a division.

Creating a division requires that you have already created entities (Working with Entities (WENT).

Offer Codes

You can create your offers before you set up source codes (Working with Offers (WOFR)) or while you are using Working with Source Codes (WSRC) Click on the arrow to prompt a pop-up window and select Create for a code.

Source Category Codes

You can create your category codes before you set up source codes Working with Source Categories (WSCT) or while you are using Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Click on the arrow to prompt a pop-up window and select Create for a code.

Pricing Method

You need to determine how pricing will be calculated for orders for a source code. The Reg Hierarchy and Reg Plus Reprice pricing methods require that the Pricing Values (B31) parameters in the System Control table (WSYS) be established for these pricing methods to work.

Freight Charges

You can use one of the following freight methods to add freight to an order.

Freight Method	Description
Order Level Freight Methods:
Dollar chart by offer (	Allows you to charge freight based on the dollar amount of the merchandise ordered for each shipping address on an order. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: Select $ Chart by Ofr in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Define the dollar tier levels and the corresponding freight charges in Working with Dollar Chart by Offer (WDCO).
Dollar chart by source (	Allows you to charge freight or service charges based on the dollar amount of the merchandise ordered for each shipping address on an order. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: Select $ Chart by Src in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC) Define the dollar tier levels and the corresponding freight or service charges in Working with Dollar Chart by Source Code (WDCS).
Actual billing amount (	Uses the total weight of all the items on the order and the shipper to determine the actual freight charge during Confirmation or Billing. The actual freight charge is determined by: Entering the freight manually using the Meter charge field in Manually Confirming Shipments (MCON). The system then recalculates the order totals based on any new or additional freight amounts. To use: Select Actual Bill Amt in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC)
Flat rate by ship-to (	Uses the flat freight amount defined for the source code as the amount of freight to charge a customer on an order. If a flat freight amount is not defined for the source code, the system uses the flat freight amount defined for the offer as the amount of freight to charge the customer on an order. To use: Select Flat Rt/Ship To in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Flat Freight Rate field in Working with Offers (WOFR), or Enter an amount in the Flat amt (Flat amount) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC)
Percentage by source (	Multiplies the merchandise amount of the order by a freight percentage defined for the source code, rounding up or down to the nearing two-position decimal. This method also considers the freight minimum and freight maximum defined for the source code. The system adjusts the freight fee to the maximum or minimum charge if the calculation results in a freight fee over or under the maximum or minimum value. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: Select $ Source in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter a percentage in the Freight % (Freight percentage) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Frt min (Freight minimum) and Frt max (Freight maximum) fields in Working with Source Codes (WSRC).
Percentage by ship via (	Multiplies the merchandise amount of the order by freight percentage defined for the shipper, rounding up or down to the nearest two-position decimal. This method also considers the freight minimum and freight maximum defined for the shipper. The system adjusts the freight fee to the maximum or minimum charge if the calculation results in a freight fee over or under the maximum or minimum value. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: . Select % Ship Via in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). . Enter a percentage in the Freight percent field in Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Enter an amount in the Freight minimum and Freight maximum fields in Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA).
Recipient freight	Calculates freight by dollar based on the merchandise total of the order including all recipient orders. The Maximum number of ship to’s field defined for the source code is checked. If the number of recipients on the order is less than or equal to this value, the Dollar Chart by Offer will determine the freight fee, based on the merchandise total. Once the maximum number of recipient orders is reached, the system includes a flat amount with the freight amount for each additional recipient order. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: Select Recipient in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter a number in the Max shp tos-frt (Maximum ship to's, freight) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC) Enter an amount in the Flat amt (Flat amount) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Define freight by dollar in Working with Dollar Chart by Offer (WDCO).
	Recipient freight example Maximum ship to’s freight = 2 Flat amount = 10.00 Dollar chart by offer (WDCO) dollar amount $10.00 = freight charge 1.00 dollar amount $20.00 = freight charge 2.00 dollar amount $30.00 = freight charge 3.00 An order contains 3 recipients: 1st recipient: merchandise amount = 10.00, freight amount = 1.00 2nd recipient: merchandise amount = 10.00, freight amount = 1.00 3rd recipient: merchandise amount = 10.00, freight amount = 11.00 (flat amount + freight) Total freight across recipients = 13.00
By Offer Price freight	Uses a dollar chart by offer to calculate freight, based on the total merchandise value of the order. For this freight method, the merchandise value is calculated by adding the extended single-unit offer price for each item/SKU, disregarding any discounts, associate pricing, price overrides, quantity break pricing, etc. Prorate freight? If the Prorate Freight Charges (D39 system control value is selected, freight will be prorated based on the percentage of the merchandise total shipped, rather than on the appropriate level on the dollar chart. See the Prorate Freight Charges (D39) system control value for examples. No-charge items: Even items that are added to the order at no charge, such as package inserts identified through Package Insert Processing (WPIP) are included in the merchandise total for the purposes of calculating freight. Freight-exempt items: Items that you identify as freight-exempt through the Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI) menu option are not included if the Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) system control value is selected.
	Tax-inclusive pricing: If the order uses tax-inclusive pricing, the system uses the tax-inclusive offer price rather than the regular offer price to determine the total merchandise value. See the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value for more information. Include handling? If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, then any handling charges will be added to the merchandise total for the purpose of determining the freight charge. Override item offer price? If you add an item to the order using a price override reason code whose Override item offer price flag is selected, then the Offer price stored in the Order Detail table is set to the actual price charged for the item. In this situation, the system uses the actual price as the offer price for the purposes of calculating freight by offer price. See Establishing Price Override Reason Codes (WPOR) for more information on price override reason codes. Note: If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system will also include handling along with merchandise in the freight charge calculation. To use: Select By Offer Price in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Define a dollar chart in Working with Dollar Chart by Offer (WDCO). Create an item/offer or SKU/offer (MITM).
Freight by order weight (	This freight method is based on the total weight of the order and the number of cartons required to ship the order. The system uses the following information to calculate freight: the total weight of the items. the maximum weight you can pack in each carton. the extra weight to add for each carton. The system calculates the total number of cartons required to ship the order and the expected weight of each using the above information. The system then uses the freight table defined for the source code to calculate the rate to charge for each carton. If the item is a ship-alone item, the system determines the weight for each unit and adds an extra weight amount before checking the freight table. See Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB) for more information on how to define freight tables and examples of how this freight method is calculated. When calculated: In order entry, the system calculates freight by order weight during repricing, the initial and final order accept, and when you select to change the last line on the order if you do not change its order quantity. The Freight field on the order does not include order weight freight charges as you add lines to the order; however, the system does display ship via service charges and ship via weight charges immediately. When the system calculates freight by order weight, the system updates the Freight field for the order with the complete freight amount. In order maintenance, the system calculates freight by order weight as you add or change each line on the order. The Freight field on the order includes all freight charges as changes to freight are made to the order. To use: Select Order Weight in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC) Define a weight table in Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB). Enter the weight table in the Freight table field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter a weight for each item in the Sell wgt. (Selling weight) field in Enter/Maintain Items (MITM). Enter a weight in the Maximum carton weight field in Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Enter a weight in the Extra Weight for Order Weight Freight Method (D85) system control value.
Line Level Freight Methods:
Flat rate by item (	Allows you to charge one freight amount per item, regardless of the quantity ordered of the item. The freight amount is defined for each item in the Item Offer or SKU Offer table. The freight total represents the accumulation of each item's flat freight fee. To use: Select Flat Rt/Item in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). . Enter a freight amount in the Freight field for each item in the Item Offer or SKU Offer (MITM).
Flat rate by quantity (	Allows you to charge a flat rate for a certain number of units ordered and add an additional charge for each unit thereafter. The calculation is: `Flat amt + ((Qty ord - Up to Frt Qty) * Secondary freight)` To use: Select Flat Rt/Qty in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Flat amt (Flat amount) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter a number in the Up to frt qty (Up to freight quantity) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Secondary frt (Secondary freight) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC).
Flat rate by item source (	Uses a flat freight charge for each unit ordered multiplied by the number of units ordered. To use: Select Flat Rt/Itm Src in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Flat amt (Flat amount) field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC).
Item (	Uses the freight amount for the item offer or SKU offer, multiplied by the quantity ordered. To use: Select By Item in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter an amount in the Freight field for the item offer or SKU offer (MITM).
Weight freight	This freight method uses the weight of each item and the rate for the shipper. The weight of the item is multiplied by the quantity ordered to calculate the total weight for the order line. In order to determine the freight charge, the system references the associated rate chart for each line, based on the total weight and delivery zone. The total weight is rounded up for the purposes of freight by weight if the partial pound is .50 or more; otherwise, the total weight is rounded down. For example, if the total weight is 3.51 pounds, the 4 pound rate is used; if the total weight is 3.49 pounds, the 3 pound rate is used. Because partial pounds of .49 or lower are rounded down, no freight will be added to the order if the total weight is under a half pound. Example: You are shipping an order to a business address in zip code 01760. The ship via on the order is 1, and the total weight of the shipment is 4.5 pounds. The shipping rate for ship via 1, zone 01 (for 01760), and 5 pounds is $2.00. If the total shipping weight in the above example were 4.4 pounds, the system would round this total down and use the 4 pound shipping rate. To use: Select Weight in the Freight method field in Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Enter a sell weight for each item in Enter/Maintain Items (MITM). . Define shipping rates for each ship via in Working with Shipping Rates (WSHR).

Promotional Codes

If you want to collect data at the promotion code level, create promotion codes before you set up source codes Working with Promotions (WPRO)). Promotion codes give another level of reporting between source codes and offers.

You can also use promotion codes to:

display a pop-up message in order entry
apply a merchandise, freight, or additional freight discount in order entry
override the ship via in order entry

Other information that can be added using Working with Source Codes (WSRC):

Item special pricing
Free gift items
Freight by dollar chart
Service charges by dollar chart
Dollar discounts

For more information: See Working with Entities (WENT) for the Order Administration sales reporting hierarchy.

About Messaging Promotions

Purpose: You can use a promotion to display a pop-up message in order entry by:

entering up to four lines of pop-up message text for the promotion code through the Work with Promotion Values menu option;
assigning the promotion code to one or more source codes through the Work with Source Codes menu option.

When you have entered header information for an order whose source code is associated with the promotion, the promotional pop-up window opens. The window opens only for the range of dates you specify for the promotion. If you also set up pop-up window messages for the source code, this window opens first, and then the window with the promotion window opens.

Single promotion message: You can set up only one promotion message to display in order entry for each source code.

Message-only promotions through the order API: If the CWOrderIn message specifies a message-only promotion and the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected, the message-only promotion applies to the order and the API writes an Order Transaction History message, such as SPRING13 - CHECK OUT OUR SPRING SPECIALS applied by web. These messages are available for review at the Display Order History Screen. See the Generic Order Interface (Order API) for background on using the order API.

For more information see the Order Administration Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2953017.1).

Message plus discount: You can set up a promotion that will both display a pop-up message and apply a discount to the order. See About Discount Promotions

About Discount Promotions

Purpose: You can set up the following types of discount promotions:

BOGO (Buy One Get One): A discount amount or percentage, a special price, or free gift earned by ordering:
- a quantity in a particular item category or of a particular item or SKU: BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item
- a quantity or dollar value of items assigned to a particular price code: see BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code
Item Category Discount: A discount amount or percentage, or special price, applied to merchandise within a particular item category or multiple item categories.
Order Discount: A discount amount or percentage applied to the order's merchandise total.
Freight Discount or Override: A discount amount or percentage applied to the order's freight charges; or, a freight override amount; or free freight.
Additional Freight Discount: A discount amount or percentage applied to the order's additional freight charges.
Tiered Discount or Free Gift: A discount amount or percentage, or a free gift, of increasing value based on the total merchandise value of the order. For example, a tiered promotion might include an inexpensive free gift for an order of $20.00 to $29.99, a 5% discount for an order of $30.00 to $49.99, a 10% discount for an order of $50.00 to $99.99, and so on.

Ship Via Override: Although this is not a separate promotion type, you can also use a promotion code to assign a ship via override to an order. A ship via override can be set up as a separate promotion, or added to an order, freight, or additional freight discount promotion.

How does an order qualify? You can set up an order, freight, or additional freight promotion that will apply to every order you take; to do so, do not complete any of the qualifying fields for the promotion. The promotion can apply to the order as long as the current date falls within the date range specified for the promotion.

Use once?

For the other promotion types, or if you want to restrict an order, freight, or additional freight promotion to only certain orders, your selection criteria can include:

source code (used on order header) or offer (associated with the source code used on the order header). You can also exclude source codes from a promotion by selecting the Exclude promotions field for the source code. Typically, you would exclude a source code from promotions when you have set up a promotion that specifies an offer, and you want to include most of the source codes associated with that offer except for a few.
pay type (even if this pay type is not the only one on the order)
merchandise total
total item quantity (minimum or maximum)
shipping location, such as restricting a freight or additional freight promotion to a range of SCF codes or to the continental U.S.A. (freight or additional freight promotions only)
customer or customer price group
order history (including first-time buyers who have never placed an order, or never received an order shipment)
item categories
ship via priority

Important:

The system evaluates promotion qualifiers on an “all or nothing” basis; in other words, if you set up a promotion to qualify based on source code, pay type, and merchandise total, and an order does not match all of these qualifiers, none of the discounts or overrides of the promotion will apply to the order. To apply the promotion to any order matching either the source code, pay type, or merchandise total, set up a separate promotion for each.

See the Cautions Related to Promotions.

Discount Promotions

BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item

BOGO promotions by item category or item apply a discount of up to 100% to an order line, apply a dollar discount or special price, or add a free item to the order. An order qualifies based on an item category’s or item’s ordered quantity.

Examples:

Buy two of the same item, third one already on the order is 50% off
Buy five within an item category, sixth one already on the order is free
Buy any four SKU’s of an item, get fifth SKU already on the order at $1.00
Buy five of the same item, get one free added to the order automatically

Note:

Two different types of BOGO promotions: This discussion applies to BOGO promotions you set up when the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY. See BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code for a discussion on BOGO promotions available when the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE.

Discount applies to the lowest-priced item: If multiple order lines are eligible for the same entry in the BOGO promotion by item category or item, the lowest-priced eligible order line is discounted. For example, you set up a promotion for the toy item category: buy two, get one at 30% off. The customer orders two of item AB100 at $10.00, one of item BC200 at $12.00, and one of item CD300 at $9.00. All these items are assigned to the specified item category. The discount applies to item CD300 at $9.00.

Multiplying the BOGO discount: You can use the Allow mult flag so that the customer can multiply the BOGO discount: for example, buy five get one free; buy ten get two free; and so on.

BOGO promotions require an order line with the BOGO quantity: In order for a BOGO promotion by item category or item to apply to an order, there must be an order line that matches the BOGO quantity. For example, if you set up a BOGO promotion by item category or item as “buy two, get one at 50% off,” the order does not receive the 50% discount unless there is an eligible order line with a quantity of 1. The BOGO promotion does not apply to an order with a quantity of two.

Important:

If you select the Allow multiples setting for any BOGO promotions by item category or item, then the order line quantity must be 1 for every order line on an order that might be eligible for the promotion; otherwise, the BOGO promotion might not apply correctly. To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Default Order Quantity (B30) and Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.

Setting up multiple entries for a BOGO promotion: You can set up multiple entries for a BOGO promotion by item category or item: for example, buy two from category A, get one at 30% off; buy two from category B, get 40% off. When an order is eligible for this type of BOGO promotion, the system determines how to apply the discount as follows:

Entries with the same qualifying quantity: If an order line qualifies for multiple entries (at item category, base item, or SKU level) but with the same qualifying quantity, only one of the entries applies:
- If it is a SKU’d item, the BOGO entry set up for the base item takes precedence. If there is no entry for the base item, the entry for the specific SKU takes precedence; otherwise, the item category entry applies.
- If it is a non-SKU’d item, the BOGO entry set up for the item takes precedence; otherwise, the item category entry applies.
Entries with different qualifying quantities but same qualifier: If an order line qualifies for multiple entries for the same level (item category, base item, or SKU) but with different qualifying quantities, the promotion applies all entries for which the order line qualifies. For example, you set up a promotion with entries to buy one, get one at 50% off and buy five, get one free. If the order includes a line with a quantity of five and a line with a quantity of one, both discounts apply: the line for one unit is discounted 50% and a free line is added.
Preventing additional discounting: If you specify a Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45), the system applies this price override reason code to order lines discounted or added free through a BOGO promotion by item category. This price override reason code prevents the order line from being discounted by any other system-applied method, in order to prevent “double dipping.” However, you can still discount these lines through the application of a coupon (set up through Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR)); also, discounted lines can still count as part of the qualifying quantity, even if the pricing method is BOGO and the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) is used, as described below.
Multiple discounts for the same BOGO promotion can still apply to the order: When you create a BOGO promotion by item category or item with multiple entries, it is important to test it to make sure it is applying discounts as intended. For example, if you set up a BOGO promotion that specifies a discount for an item category and also adds a free item for a specific item, and the item is assigned to the item category, the promotion might both apply the discount and add the free item. The Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) is applied to the free order line; however, the order line with the quantity of five is still eligible for subsequent discounting.

Similarly, you can set up a BOGO promotion to buy five, get one at 50% off. The promotion discounts the line with the quantity of one. However, if the order is also eligible for an item category promotion, the qualifying order line with the quantity of five can also be discounted through the item category promotion.

Does not produce negative price: A BOGO promotion by item category or item will not result in a negative price, even if the Disc $ specified is more than the unit price of the order line.

Note:
A BOGO promotion by item category or item cannot include a ship via override.

To set up a BOGO promotion by item category or item,complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = BOGO, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the item category(ies) or item(s)):
- Source code or Offer
- Dollar amount
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer
- Pay type
- Ship via priority
Other optional fields:
- Promotion ID
- Item or item category exclusions

You also need to enter information at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item).

BOGO Promotion by Item Category or Item Examples

Summary	Setup	Order Entry
Order three plush toys, get one at 50% off	Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): Item category = PLH (plush toys) Req qty = 3 BOGO qty = 1 Free = NO Disc % = 50.00	Order includes order lines for four plush toys. The order line for the lowest-priced plush toy is discounted 50%.
Order two pens, get one for $1.00	Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): Item = PEN Req qty = 2 BOGO qty = 1 Free = NO Price = 1.00	Order includes a total of three order lines for SKU’s of the PEN item. The lowest-priced order line is repriced to $1.00.
Order five plush toys, get the sixth one free	Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): Item category = PLH (plush toys) Req qty = 5 BOGO qty = 1 Free = YES Allow mult = unselected	Order includes an order line for five of one plush toy and one of another plush toy. The order line for the single plush toy is repriced to “no charge.”
For orders totalling $50.00 or more, order three pencils, get one added to the order free; order six, get two added free; and so on	Create Promotion Screen Qualifying $ amount = 50.00 Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): Item = PENCIL) Req qty = 3 BOGO qty = 1 Free = Free Auto Add Allow mult = selected	Order includes six order lines for the item PENCIL. An order line for the item PENCIL with a quantity of two is added to the order at “no charge.”
Order two pens, get $1.00 off two; also, order one sticker set, get 20% off another sticker set	Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) (for a single BOGO promotion or on separate BOGO promotions): 1. Item category = UTN Req qty = 2 BOGO qty = 2 Free = NO Disc $ = 1.00 2. Item category = STK Req qty = 1 BOGO qty = 1 Free = NO Disc % = 20.00	Order includes: PEN123 BLUE 2@ 3.00 PEN123 BLK 2 @ 3.00 STK456: 1 @ 10.00 STK789: 1 @ 10.00 After applying the BOGO discounts, the unit prices of the qualifying and BOGO lines are: PEN123 BLUE 2@ 3.00 PEN123 BLK 2 @ 2.00 ($1.00 off each) STK456: 1 @ 10.00 STK789: 1 @ 8.00 (20% off)
Order five magnet sets, get one 50% off	Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): Item category = MGN (magnets) Req qty = 5 BOGO qty = 1 Free = NO Disc % = 50.00	1. Order includes: MGN123 5 @ 5.00 MGN234 1 @ 4.50 After applying the BOGO discount, the unit price of MGN234 is 2.50 2. Order includes: MGN123 10 @ 5.00 MGN234 2 @ 4.50 Order does not receive the BOGO discount, since the BOGO qty is 1 and there is no eligible order line with a quantity of one. Note: For the second example order to qualify for the BOGO discount, item MGN234 should be entered as two separate order lines, each with a quantity of one. This is true regardless of the setting of the Allow multiples flag.

BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code

BOGO promotions by price code apply a discount of up to 100% to one or more order lines, apply a dollar discount or special price, or add a free item to the order. An order qualifies based on a price code’s ordered quantity, total merchandise value, or both.

Examples:

Order at least two items assigned to the same price code, third one already on the order is free
Order one item assigned to a price code, get another item from a different price code free
Order an item priced at $500 or more and assigned to a specific price code, get another item added to the order free

Note:

Two different types of BOGO promotions: This discussion applies to BOGO promotions you set up when the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE. See BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item for a discussion on BOGO promotions available when the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY.

Discount lowest-priced item(s): If multiple order lines are eligible for the same entry in the BOGO promotion by price code, the lowest-priced eligible order line is discounted. For example, you set up a promotion: buy two from men’s fleece, get one from men’s fleece at 30% off. The customer orders two of item AB100 at $100.00, one of item BC200 at $120.00, and one of item CD300 at $90.00. All these items are assigned to the specified price code. The discount applies to item CD300.

Order line quantity must be 1: In order for a BOGO promotion by price code to apply to an order, the lines for the eligible items must be 1.To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.

Multiplying the BOGO discount: You can use the Allow mult flag so that the customer can multiply the BOGO discount: for example, buy five get one free; buy ten get two free; and so on.

Prorating the discount: Regardless of the type of discount, you can use the Prorate flag to prorate the discount across all of the items and order lines subject to the promotion. This option enables you to account for the proportional amount of the discount if you process a return against the discounted order. For example, you set up a BOGO promotion to buy $500 in price code 22, get item EF123 (normally sold at $100) added to the order free. If the Prorate flag is:

unselected: item EF123 is added to the order at no charge, and the promotion does not change the prices of items assigned to price code 22.
selected: the $100 discount represented by adding EF123 at no charge is prorated across the order line for EF123 and the other order lines for items assigned to price code 22. If the item in price code 22 was $1000, the promotion discounts it to $909.09, and adds EF123 with a price of $90.91.

Single discount for each promotion, but multiple promotions can apply to an order: When you use BOGO promotions by price code, each BOGO promotion can specify just a single discount. It is not possible to set up multiple discounts for a single BOGO promotion by price code. However, different groups of lines on an order can qualify for different BOGO promotions (for example, buy $500 in luggage and get a free travel bag, plus buy two sweaters and get one at 30% off).

Discount is always based on or applied to the lower-priced item(s): BOGO promotions by price code require that any discount calculation be based on the lower-priced items within the total BOGO quantity, and applied to the lower-priced items if the discount is not prorated, regardless of whether the lower-priced item is in the qualifying Price code or the BOGO PC. For example:

If the promotion specifies “buy one, get one 30% off,” the 30% discount is calculated based on the lower-priced item.
If the promotion specifies “buy one, get $20 off one” and is not prorated, the $20 discount applies to the lower-priced item.

If the total discount from the promotion exceeds the price of the lower-priced item(s), then the actual discount applied is limited to the price of the lower-priced item(s). For example, if the promotion specifies “buy one, get $20 off one” and is prorated, but the lower-priced item is $15, then the total prorated discount is $15.

Preventing additional discounting: If you specify a , the system applies this price override reason code to order lines discounted or added free through a BOGO promotion by price code. This price override reason code prevents the order line from being discounted by any other system-applied method, in order to prevent “double dipping.” However, you can still discount these lines through the application of a coupon (set up through Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR)); also, discounted lines can still count as part of the qualifying quantity, even if the pricing method is BOGO and the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) is used, as described below.

Does not produce negative price: A BOGO promotion by price code does not result in a negative price, even if the Disc $ specified is more than the unit price of the order line.

Note:

A BOGO promotion by price code cannot include a ship via override.

To use BOGO promotions by price code without price code discounts: It is not necessary to use price code discounts in order to use BOGO promotions by price code. To group items by price code without applying discounts through the price code assignment:

Set the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE.
Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45)
Use Working with Price Codes (WPCD) to create one or more price codes to group items for BOGO promotions:
- Specify a Start date and End date that are in the past.
- Set the Qty required to a number higher than your highest possible order line quantity.
- Specify a very small discount: for example, specify a Percent discount of .01.
Use Assigning Price Codes (APCD) to assign items to price codes.
Use the Create Promotion Screen and the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen to create each BOGO promotion by price code.

To set up a BOGO promotion by price code, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = BOGO, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the price code(s) or item:
- Source code or Offer
- Customer(s) OR Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer
- Pay type
- Maximum quantity
- Ship via priority
Other optional fields:
- Promotion ID

You also need to enter information at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen.

Important:

The available options for configuring a BOGO promotion by price code are described in the table below. Using a different configuration option may produce unintended results when the promotion applies to an order.
To use BOGO promotions by price code, you must create each order line with a quantity of one. Calculating discounts for a BOGO promotion by price code is not supported if the order line quantity is greater than one.

BOGO Promotion by Price Code Options and Samples

Summary	Setup	Order Entry
Order two items assigned to a price code, get one item assigned to the same price code free if the third item is already on the order. Prorate the discount across the three order lines.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen Price code, BOGO price code = same price code Req qty = 2 BOGO qty = 1 Prorate = selected Allow multiples = unselected Free = Free Note: The qualifying price code and the BOGO price code must be the same.	Order includes three items assigned to price code 11: AB123 at $100.00 BC234 at $90.00 CD345 at $80.00 Total items for promotion: $270.00 Free item price is prorated: When the promotion applies, the $80 price of CD345 (the item with the lowest price) is prorated across the three items in the price code: AB123 is now $70.37 BC234 is now $63.33 CD345 is now $56.30 Total items for promotion: $190.00 Note: If the order includes more than three items assigned to the price code, the discount is prorated across the three lowest-priced qualifying items. Discount calculation: For each order line, the system calculates the discounted, prorated price by multiplying the item price by the discounted merchandise total, then dividing the result by the original merchandise total. For example, for AB123: `(100.00 * 190.00) / 270.00 = 70.37`.
Order one item assigned to a price code, get a lower-priced item assigned to a different price code free if this item is already on the order; order two or more items assigned to a price code, get two lower-priced items assigned to a different price code free if the latter two items are already on the order; and so on. Do not prorate the discount.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen: Price code = and BOGO price code = different price codes, with the BOGO price code specifying lower-priced items Req qty = 1 BOGO qty = 1 Prorate = unselected Allow multiples = selected Free = Free	Order includes: EF456 (price code 11) at $100.00 GH567 (price code 22) at $90.00 Free item: When the promotion applies, the price of GH567 changes to .00. Multiple? If the order also included: IJ678 (price code 11) at $95.00 KL789 (price code 22) at $80.00 Then the price of LK789 also changes to .00. Note: The free item(s) must be the lower-priced item(s); so if the item assigned to price code 22 is priced higher than the item assigned to price code 11, then the item assigned to price code 11 is discounted to .00.
Order one item assigned to a price code, get an item assigned to the same price code at 30% off; order two items assigned to the price code, get two items assigned to the same price code at 30% off; and so on. Prorate the discount across the order lines.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen: Price code and BOGO price code = the same price code Req qty = 1 BOGO qty = 1 Disc % = 30.00 Prorate = selected Allow mult = selected	Order includes the following items assigned to price code 11: MN890: $100.00 OP901: $90.00 QR012: $80.00 ST123: $70.00 Total items for promotion: $340.00 Total discount: When the promotion applies, the total discount is $45.00, which is 30% $150 (the total of the $80 price of QR012 and the $70.00 price of ST123, which are the items with the lowest prices. Discounted prices: The discount of $45.00 is prorated across the four items in the price code: MN890 is now $86.76 OP901 is now $78.09 QR012 is now $69.41 ST123 is now $60.74 Total items for promotion: $295.00 Prorated discount calculation: For each order line, the system calculates the discounted, prorated price by multiplying the item price by the discounted merchandise total, then dividing the result by the original merchandise total. For example, MN890: `(100.00 * 295.00) / 340.00 = 86.76`. Note: If there is a single additional item assigned to price code 11 (for example, 5 units rather than 4), its price is not included when prorating since it is not part of the total quantity for the promotion.
Order an item assigned to a price code and priced at $498 or higher for one unit, get a specific item added to the order free, and prorate the price of the free item with the required item.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen: Price code = specified Req amt = $498.00 Req qty = 1 BOGO quantity, BOGO price code = not specified Prorate = selected Allow multiple = unselected Free = Free Auto Add Auto Item = specified	Order includes item UV234, assigned to price code 333, for $1000. Free item added: When the promotion applies, it adds item XY345, normally $100.00, to the order. Prorated discount applied: The related order lines are: UV234 is now $909.09 XY345 is added at $90.91 Prorated discount calculation: For each order line, the system calculates the discounted, prorated price by multiplying the item price by the discounted merchandise total, then dividing the result by the original merchandise total including the free item. For example, UV234: `(1000.00 * 1000.00) / 1100.00 = 909.09`. Note: The price of a single unit of the qualifying item must be at least the required amount. For example, if the required amount is $498.00 and the order includes two items for $250 each assigned to the price code, the order does not qualify. If not prorated? You can create a similar promotion with the Prorate flag unselected. In this case, the promotion does not discount the item from the required price code, and the free item is added at no charge. If the free item is already on the order: The promotion adds an additional unit of the free item if there is already a unit on the order. The unit already on the order is not discounted.
		If multiple qualifying items: If the order includes multiple qualifying items from the specified price code, the discount is prorated across all qualifying items.
Get 10% off any items assigned to a price code if their combined price is $500 or higher, regardless of quantity on the order.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen: Price code and BOGO price code = the same price code Req amt = $500.00 BOGO qty = 99999 Disc % = 10.00 Prorate = unselected Allow multiples = unselected Note: You need to specify a BOGO quantity of 99999 for a promotion to require a certain dollar amount but not specify a required quantity.	Order includes items assigned to price code 44: ZA456: $100.00 BC456: $150.00 DE567: $300.00 Total: $550.00 Discount applied: ZA456 is now $90.00 BC456 is now $135.00 DE567 is now $270.00
Order one item in a price code, get $20.00 off a lower-priced item in a different price code. Prorate the discount across the order lines.	Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen: Price code = and BOGO price code = different price codes, with the BOGO price code specifying lower-priced items Req qty = 1 BOGO qty = 1 Disc $ = $20.00 Prorate = selected Allow multiples = unselected	Order includes: EF456 (price code 11) at $250.00 GH567 (price code 22) at $100.00 Prorated discount applied: The related order lines are: EF456 is now $235.71 GH567 is now $94.29 Prorated discount calculation: For each order line, the system calculates the discounted, prorated price by multiplying the item price by the discounted merchandise total, then dividing the result by the original merchandise total including the free item. For example, GH567: `(100.00 * 330.00) / 350.00 = 94.29`. Discount cannot exceed price: The total amount of the Disc $ cannot exceed the price of either of the items; otherwise, the promotion discounts the items by the price of that item. For example, if the Disc $ is $20.00 and one of the items is $10.00, the promotion applies a discount of $10.00.

What if other repricing makes the order ineligible? It is possible for additional pricing options to make the items on an order ineligible for a promotion. For example:

price code: A price code discount might make an order ineligible for a promotion that specifies a required merchandise amount. For example, a promotion specifies a BOGO qty of 1 and a Req amt of $500.00. If the order includes an item priced at $500.00 but discounted 15% through a price code, the order does not qualify for the promotion.
best price comparison: When you use Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison, if the calculated price for the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) is lower than the price after applying the promotion, the order line uses the lower price.

Item Category Discount

You can set up item category promotions based on the merchandise total on the order or within the item category or categories, or on the quantity ordered within the item category(ies). You can specify a flat discount amount or a percentage to apply to items within the specified item category(ies), or a special price for items in the category(ies).

Example: Prorate a $5.00 discount against items within an item category if you order $30.00 or more within the category; or apply a 15% discount to items within a specific category when the order total is $75.00 or higher.

Negative additional charge not an option: Unlike some of the other promotion types, an item category promotion cannot use an additional charge code to apply a discount as a negative additional charge on the order. The discount amount or percentage is applied directly to the order detail lines within the specified item category(ies).

Note:

An item category promotion cannot include a ship via override.

Applying to multiple item categories: You can set up an item category promotion to apply the same discount percentage, amount, or special price to multiple item categories. You can also specify whether to apply qualifiers such as total dollar value, minimum quantity, or maximum quantity based on the entire order or within an item category. See the examples, below, for more information.

Other discount rules: When an item category promotion applies a discount amount, it follows the same prorating logic and rules as an Order Discount, including the rules for sale items and non-discountable items. See the Order Discount discussion for more information.

To set up an item category promotion, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = Item Category, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the item category(ies)):
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Qualifying dollar amount
- Qualifying dollar amount type
- Qualifying quantity
- Maximum quantity
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
Type of discount (one only):
- Item category special price
- Discount percent
- Discount amount
Other optional fields and options:
- Promotion ID
- Item or item category exclusions

You also need to specify the eligible item category or categories at the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen.

Item Category Promotion Examples

Summary	Setup	Order Entry
Order $25.00 in stickers, get 15% off stickers	Create Promotion Screen: specify a Qualifying $ amount of 25.00, a Qualifying type of Item Category, and a Discount percent of 15.00. Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: specify the stickers item category	Customer orders $50.00 in stickers and $10.00 in other merchandise. The 15% discount is applied to the sticker items on the order. The promotion does not discount any other merchandise on the order.
Order $75.00 total merchandise, get $5.00 off pencils and magnets	Create Promotion Screen: specify a Qualifying $ amount of 75.00, a Qualifying type of Order, and a Discount amount of $5.00. Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: specify the pencils and magnets item categories	Customer orders $80.00 in total merchandise, including $15.00 in pencils and magnets. The $5.00 discount is applied against the order line(s) within each of the item categories ($5.00 across each category). The promotion does not discount any other merchandise on the order. Note: If the Qualifying type was set to Item Category, then none of the items on the order would qualify for the promotion unless the total dollar value within the category was at least $75.00.
Order five sticker sets or pencil sets, get 20% off.	Create Promotion Screen: specify a Qualifying qty of 5, a Qualifying type of Order, and a Discount percent of 20.00. Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: specify the item categories for the sticker sets and pencil sets	Customer orders three sticker sets, four pencil sets, and a magnet set. The 20% discount is applied against both the sticker sets and pencil sets because they are within the specified categories and the total unit quantity on the order is greater than five.
Order at least 5 stickers, magnets, or pencils, get $2.00 off each category	Create Promotion Screen: specify a Qualifying qty of 5, a Qualifying type of Item category, and a Discount amount of 2.00. Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: specify the item categories for the sticker sets, magnet sets, and pencil sets	Customer orders six sticker sets, five magnet sets, and a pencil set. A $2.00 discount is prorated across the sticker set lines, and a $2.00 discount is also prorated across the magnet set lines. No discount applies to the pencils because this item category does not meet the qualifying quantity of five.
Get stickers or magnets at $1.99 each (limit 5).	Create Promotion Screen: specify a Maximum qty of 5, a Qualifying type of Item category, and an Item category special price of 1.99. Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: specify the item categories for the sticker sets and magnet sets	Customer orders five sticker sets and six magnet sets. The sticker sets are repriced to $1.99, but the magnet sets are not because the total quantity for the item category exceeds the maximum.

Can you combine item category promotions? You can offer more than one item category promotion at a time by setting up:

a single item category promotion for two or more categories if all item categories should receive the same discounting. For example, you can offer 10% off stickers, magnets, and pencils.
a separate item category promotion for each category, especially if each item category should receive a different type of discount: For example, you can offer 10% off stickers and $5.00 magnets. Both promotions can apply to the same order if it qualifies.

Note:

The system does not apply two item category promotions to an order if they specify the same item category. See Promotion Logic and Processing for information on how the system selects a promotion to apply.

Preventing additional discounting: If you specify a Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45), the system applies this price override reason code to order lines discounted through an item category promotion. This price override reason code prevents the order line from being discounted by any other system-applied method, in order to prevent “double dipping.” However, you can still discount these lines through the application of a coupon (set up through Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR)).

Note:

It is possible to produce a negative merchandise total on an order by applying an item category promotion whose Discount amount exceeds the current merchandise total. To avoid this situation, specify a qualifying dollar amount.

Can you set up a buy one/get one promotion for an item category? You can also use item category as a qualifier for a BOGO promotion if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY. See BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item for more information.

How do you assign items to item categories? Item category assignment is at the SKU level, and you specify an item category assignment at the Create Item (Base Information) Screen (non-SKU’d item) or the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen (SKU’d item). You can also assign an item category through Using the SKU Generator (ESKG).

Item category codes are defined in and validated against the Item Category table. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG) for more information.

Order Discount

Order discount promotions apply to the merchandise on the order. You can specify either a flat discount amount or a percentage.

Example: Apply a $5.00 discount to orders with source code AB1234 with merchandise totals of $50.00 or more.

Prorate discounts? If you specify an additional charge code for the promotion, the discount will appear on the order as a credit additional charge; otherwise, the discount amount is prorated against the items on the order.

Example:

An order contains the following items, and a $4.00 discount applies based on the promotion:

AB100: 2 @ $5.00 ($10.00)
BB200: 1 @ $10.00
CC300: 1 @ $20.00

Merchandise total: $40.00

If you specify an additional charge code, the discount appears as a $4.00 negative additional charge on the order; the extended price of each line remains unchanged.

If you do not specify an additional charge code, the extended price of each order line is:

$10.00 - $1.00 = $9.00 (2 @$4.50)
$10.00 - $1.00 = $9.00
$10.00 = $2.00 = $18.00

Prorating discounts and sale items: The Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value affects the discounting only for an order-level percentage discount, or for a dollar discount if there is no additional charge code specified. See that system control value for more information and examples.

The Sale item flag for the Item Offer or the Sale item flag for the SKU Offer indicates whether an item is a sale item.

Note:

This system control value also controls whether the system includes sale items when determining if an order qualifies for a promotion based on quantity. If the system control value is selected, sale items are not included when the promotion is based on quantity; however, they are included when evaluating an order for a promotion based on dollar value.

Non-discountable items: Items that are flagged as non-discountable (based on the setting of the Discountable flag) are always excluded from prorating of discounts; also, they are not included in the merchandise total or the qualifying quantity when the system determines whether an order meets the Qualifying $ amount (Qualifying dollar amount) required to apply a promotion.

Meeting a quantity requirement for an order discount: Items that are sold out or free of charge, or that are non-discountable as described above, are not included in the Qualifying quantity, if any, specified for an order discount promotion. Also, if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, items which are flagged as sale items for the Item Offer or SKU Offer are not included in the qualifying quantity.

To set up an order discount promotion, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = Order, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the item category(ies)):
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Qualifying dollar amount
- Qualifying dollar amount type
- Qualifying quantity
- Maximum quantity
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
Type of discount (one only):
- Item category special price
- Discount percent
- Discount amount
Other optional fields and options:
- Promotion ID
- Additional charge code (leave blank to prorate the discount)
- Ship via override and related fields ( see description below)
- Item or item category exclusions

Note:

An order cannot qualify for both an order promotion and a tiered promotion.

Order Discount Example

Discount description: The system subtracts 10% off the extended price of all items (Discount percent field) on any order whose header-level source code points to offer SP8 (Qualifying offer field) if the merchandise total is $50.00 or more (Qualifying dollar amount field). Additionally, if you assign this promotion code to the source code through Working with Source Codes (WSRC), the pop-up message (Pop-up message fields) will open in order entry after you enter the order header information.

The discount total will be added to the order as a negative additional charge because a code is specified in the Additional charge code field. If this field is blank, the discount would be subtracted from each order detail line extended price.

Tiered Discount or Free Gift

Tiered promotions are based on the merchandise total on the order. You can specify a flat discount amount or a percentage, or add a free gift, for each tier specified for the promotion.

Example: Apply a $5.00 discount to orders with merchandise totals of $50.00 or more; $15 to orders with merchandise totals of $100.00 or more; or add a free gift to orders with merchandise totals over $150.00.

Tier logic: The system applies the discount or free gift specified for the highest tier that the order qualifies for based on total merchandise value. Discounts or free gifts specified for lower tiers do not apply.

Example: A promotion has two tiers: a 10% discount for merchandise values of $75.00 or more, and a free gift for merchandise values over $100.00. If an order has a total merchandise value of $95.00, the 10% discount is applied. If an order has a total merchandise value of $120.00, the free gift is added but the 10% discount is not applied.

Note:

A tiered promotion cannot include a ship via override.

Other discount rules: When a tiered promotion applies a discount, it follows the same prorating logic and rules as an Order Discount, including the rules for sale items and non-discountable items. See the Order Discount discussion for more information.

To set up a tiered promotion, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = Tiered Discount, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the item category(ies)):
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
Other optional fields and options:
- Promotion ID
- Additional charge code (leave blank to prorate the discount)
- Item or item category exclusions

You also need to enter information on the tiers at the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen.

Note:

An order cannot qualify for both an order promotion and a tiered promotion.

Tiered Promotion Example

Promotion description: The promotion includes the following tiers:

free gift of a pen for orders whose total merchandise value is from $10.00 to $49.99
10% discount for orders whose total merchandise value is from $50.00 to $99.00, prorated against the order detail lines
15% discount for orders whose total merchandise value is $100.00 or more, prorated against the order detail lines

The promotion applies to source code SOURCE8 (Qualifying source field). Additionally, if you assign this promotion code to the source code through Working with Source Codes (WSRC), the pop-up message (Pop-up message fields) will display in order entry after you enter the order header information.

Because no additional charge code is specified, the discount percentage will be subtracted from each order detail line, with the exception of sale items and non-discountable items. If an additional charge code is specified, the entire discount amount would be added to the order as a negative additional charge.

Freight Discount or Override

A freight discount applies to the freight charges on an order.

You can set up the following types of freight discounts:

1. Discount amount or discount percentage applied to freight total:

Example: $5.00 off shipping if you order by the end of June; or, 50% off shipping charges if your order totals $50.00 or more.

Note:

The discount will appear on the order as a credit additional charge.

2. Freight override amount to replace freight total:

Example: Order by November 15 and pay only $3.00 in freight, regardless of order total.

3. Free freight:

Example: Free shipping for our valued customers.

You can also set up a ship via override independently of, or in addition to, a freight discount. See the description below for more information.

Meeting a quantity requirement for a freight discount or override: Items that are sold out, free of charge, drop ship, or have a ship via item charge are not included in the Qualifying quantity, if any, specified for a freight discount promotion. Also, if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected, items which are flagged as sale items for the Item Offer or SKU Offer are not included in the qualifying quantity.

Additional freight: If an order qualifies for a freight promotion, the system updates the freight charges on the order; however, any additional freight that has been assigned to the order will remain on the order. For example, if the order qualifies for a free freight promotion and the ship via on the order has an additional freight charge, the system removes the freight charges from the order, but keeps the additional freight charge. You can create an additional freight discount promotion to discount the additional freight on an order; see Additional Freight Discount.

To set up a freight discount, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = Freight, and
- Priority
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders that include the item category(ies)):
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Qualifying dollar amount
- Qualifying dollar amount type
- Qualifying quantity
- Maximum quantity
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
Other optional fields and options:
- Promotion ID
- Additional charge code
- Continental USA Only
- Ship via override and related fields (see description below)

Freight Discount Example

Discount description: The system changes the freight amount charged on an order to $3.50 if the header-level source code is SUMMER. An additional charge code is not used in this case, because the freight amount is simply overridden.

Additional Freight Discount

An additional freight discount applies to the additional freight charges on an order. You might use this type of discount for ship vias set up as Add'l freight only, or to offer express shipping at a reduced cost.

Example: Overnight shipping for the same price as ground shipping, this catalog only.

You can also set up a ship via override independently of, or in addition to, an additional freight discount:

Example: Free upgrade to Federal Express.

To set up an additional freight discount, complete the following fields at the Create Promotion Screen:

Required:
- Type = Additional Freight
- Priority
Type of additional freight discount (one only):
- Discount amount (requires additional charge code)
- Discount percent (requires additional charge code)
Any of the following qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders):
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Qualifying dollar amount
- Qualifying quantity
- Maximum quantity
- Customer(s)
- Customer price group(s)
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
Other optional fields:
- Promotion ID
- Continental USA only
- Ship via override and related fields (see description below)

Additional Freight Discount Example

Note:

This example also includes a ship via override, described in the following pages. You can set up a ship via override as part of a freight or additional freight discount, or you can set it up independently.

Discount description: The system adds a negative additional charge of $7.50 (as a discount against the additional freight amount) and overrides the ship via on the order to ship via number 4 for any order that:

has an additional freight charge, and
uses pay type 7 (Qualifying pay type), and
is shipping to the continental USA only (Continental USA only).

Ship Via Override

You can set up an order, freight, or additional freight promotion type to also include a ship via override. Alternatively, you can set up a freight or additional freight promotion type to provide a ship via override only, with no additional discounting.

Note:

You cannot include a ship via override in a tiered, item category, or BOGO discount promotion.

The system applies this ship via override to the order unless another ship via override takes precedence; see Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence.

Example: Free upgrade to Federal Express.

See the Cautions Related to Promotions for more information on how to set up a promotion that constitutes or includes a ship via override.

To set up a ship via override, complete the following fields:

Required:
- Type (Order, Freight, or Additional Freight to set up in combination with a discount; enter Freight or Additional Freight to set up as a separate promotion)
- Priority
- Ship via override
Ship via override qualifying fields (leave blank to apply to all orders):
- Country of shipping address
- From and To SCFs for shipping address
Additional optional qualifying fields:
- Source code(s) or Offer
- Pay type
- Qualifying dollar amount
- Qualifying quantity
- Maximum quantity
- Qualifying customer or customer price group
- First time buyer based on LTD Orders or LTD Sales
- Ship via priority
- Promotion ID
- Continental USA only (valid for freight or additional freight promotions only)

Promotion Logic and Processing

Your options in setting up promotions and the logic that the system uses in applying promotions to orders are described below.

When Promotions can be Either Manually-Assigned or System-Assigned

If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected and the promotion’s Required entry flag is selected, then the system does not automatically assign the promotion to an order. Instead, you need to use the Enter Promotion Code Screen to assign the promotion.

Applying the promotion in interactive order entry: The Enter Promotion Code Screen opens automatically when you select Reprice at the Work with Order Lines Screen (Adding Items to the Order) or select Accept or Exit at the Coupon Discount Window if the Prorate Dollar Discounts and Coupons (D90) system control value is selected. See Repricing Screen Flow.

At the Enter Promotion Code screen, you can specify one or more promotions to apply to the order. You can prompt on the Promotion code field to advance to the Select Promotion window. The setting of the Search Promotions by Start Date in Order Entry (M27) system control value defines how promotions sort on the Select Promotion window:

If selected, the Select Promotion window sorts promotions in ascending start date sequence.
If unselected, the Select Promotion window sorts promotions in ascending promotion code sequence.

The system confirms that the order qualifies for each promotion you select based on the basic qualifiers (those set up at the Create Promotion Screen) at the time you enter it.

Important:

In order for you to advance to the Enter Promotion Code Screen during interactive order entry, or for promotions to apply to orders automatically, the price method for the source code on the order must be set to Reg Plus Reprice.

The system also applies promotions that are not flagged for required entry if the order qualifies. See Promotion Hierarchy: Best Way and Promotion Hierarchy: Regular Priority for information on how the system determines which promotion(s) to apply to an order.

At final acceptance of the order, the system re-evaluates the order for qualifying promotions, including both those manually entered and those assigned by the system. At this time, discounts on order lines, negative additional charges, free gifts, and freight or additional freight overrides might be removed or added to the order to reflect the promotions that ultimately apply to the order.

Applying promotions to web orders: To apply a promotion flagged for required entry to an order processed through the Generic Order Interface (Order API), specify the promotion in the promotion attribute or through the Promotions element. To apply multiple promotions, you need to use the Promotions element.

For more information see the Order Administration Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2953017.1).

Order maintenance: You cannot apply a promotion to an order in order maintenance.

When Promotions Must be Assigned by the System

Combining promotions: If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected, the Enter Promotion Code Screen does not open in order entry, and you cannot specify promotion codes through the order API. Instead, the system selects the promotion(s) to apply to an order. Only promotions whose Required entry flag is unselected are eligible for selection. See Promotion Hierarchy: Best Way and Promotion Hierarchy: Regular Priority for information on how the system determines which promotion(s) to apply to an order.

Promotion Hierarchy: Best Way

Best way promotion hierarchy: The Best Way Promotions (K44) system control value indicates whether to try to apply the promotion of each type (with the exception of BOGO promotions; see Best Way Promotion Hierarchy for BOGO Promotions specifically called out for the order or customer, or that provides the highest discount. With this system control value selected, the system uses three basic criteria:

Manual entry? Manually-entered promotions (entered at the Enter Promotion Code Screen or passed in the inbound order message) are preferred over system-assigned promotions (applied automatically because the order is eligible and the Required entry flag is unselected). However, if the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected, it is not possible to manually enter a promotion code.
Customer or customer price group assignment? When you specify a customer price group for a promotion, the system prefers this promotion to those without a customer price group assignment. However, when you specify a particular customer number for a promotion, this gives the promotion higher priority than promotions with just a customer price group promotion.
Best savings? If a promotion is not differentiated through manual entry, customer assignment, or customer price group assignment, the system selects the promotion of each type that provides the highest total discount dollar value. In the case of a freight promotion, a ship via override is determined to be the best value.

As a result, the system selects among eligible promotions using the hierarchy illustrated below:

If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected, manual entry of a promotion is not possible, so the hierarchy is simpler:

Customer qualifier? Is the customer specified at the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen?
Customer price group qualifier? Is the customer assigned to a customer price group specified at the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen?
Best savings? If the customer does not qualify based on customer number or price group, or if the system must select among more than one promotion with the same qualifier, it selects the promotion of each type that provides the highest total discount dollar value.

Examples of best discount calculation:

Tiered promotion TA offers 10% off an order with a total merchandise value of $100.00, for a total discount of $10.00. Tiered promotion TB offers a free item; the item’s regular price is $15.00. Promotion TB provides the best discount ($15.00 is more than $10.00).
Item category promotion IA offers 15% off a minimum order of $25.00. Item category promotion IB offers a special item category price of $1.99. The order includes 12 units of qualifying items at $2.50 each for a total merchandise value of $30.00 in the category. Promotion IB ($1.99 * 12, or $23.88, for a total savings of $6.12) offers a better discount than promotion IA (15% of $30.00, or $4.50).

Best Way Promotion Hierarchy for BOGO Promotions

When the Best Way Promotions (K44) system control value is selected, BOGO promotions do not use the same hierarchy as other promotion types; instead, they use a simpler hierarchy:

Manually assigned? Manually-entered BOGO promotions (entered at the Enter Promotion Code Screen or passed in the inbound order message) are given higher priority than system-assigned promotions (applied automatically because the order is eligible and the Required entry flag is unselected). However, if the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected, it is not possible to manually enter a promotion code.
Assigned to source code: If there is a BOGO promotion specified for the source code and no other BOGO promotion was manually entered, the promotion from the source code applies. (The promotion must be manually entered or passed in the order API, or have the Required entry flag unselected, as described above.)
Priority: If no BOGO promotions are manually applied or assigned to the source code, the system checks for BOGO promotions that are not flagged for Required entry. If there is more than one, the BOGO promotion with the highest priority (lowest priority number) applies. If the eligible BOGO promotions have the same priority number, the system applies the first one alphanumerically.

Promotion Hierarchy: Regular Priority

When the Best Way Promotions (K44) system control value is unselected, the system does not check whether the promotion is assigned to a particular customer number or customer type, or whether it offers the best discount. Instead, it uses two different possible hierarchies, depending on the setting of the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value:

If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected:

#	Step
1.	Promotion assigned to source code: Is there a promotion of this type assigned to the source code on the order header? If the order qualifies for the promotion you have defined in the Source Code table, this promotion applies to the order. Also, if the promotion is flagged for Required entry, it must be entered on the order or passed in the order API; otherwise...
2.	Manually entered: If there is no promotion assigned to the source code, look first to promotions that are manually entered at the Enter Promotion Code Screen or passed in the order API. If more than one promotion of the same type is manually entered or passed in the order API, select the promotion based on the: lowest priority number (highest priority); if more than one, latest start date; if more than one, first one alphanumerically.
3.	System-assigned: If there is no promotion of the type manually entered or passed in the order API, look for eligible promotions that are not flagged for Required entry. If there is more than one, select the promotion based on the: lowest priority number; if more than one, latest start date; if more than one, first one alphanumerically.

Step

Promotion assigned to source code: Is there a promotion of this type assigned to the source code on the order header? If the order qualifies for the promotion you have defined in the Source Code table, this promotion applies to the order. Also, if the promotion is flagged for Required entry, it must be entered on the order or passed in the order API; otherwise...

Manually entered: If there is no promotion assigned to the source code, look first to promotions that are manually entered at the Enter Promotion Code Screen or passed in the order API. If more than one promotion of the same type is manually entered or passed in the order API, select the promotion based on the:

lowest priority number (highest priority); if more than one,
latest start date; if more than one,
first one alphanumerically.

System-assigned: If there is no promotion of the type manually entered or passed in the order API, look for eligible promotions that are not flagged for Required entry. If there is more than one, select the promotion based on the:

lowest priority number; if more than one,
latest start date; if more than one,
first one alphanumerically.

If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected:

Example #	Description
1.	Promotion assigned to source code: Is there a promotion of this type assigned to the source code on the order header? If the order qualifies for the promotion you have defined in the Source Code table (and not flagged for Required entry), this promotion applies to the order. Otherwise...
2.	System-assigned: If there is no promotion of the type assigned to the source code, look for eligible promotions that are not flagged for Required entry. If there is more than one, select the promotion based on the: lowest priority number; if more than one, latest start date; if more than one, first one alphanumerically.

Example #

Description

Promotion assigned to source code: Is there a promotion of this type assigned to the source code on the order header? If the order qualifies for the promotion you have defined in the Source Code table (and not flagged for Required entry), this promotion applies to the order. Otherwise...

System-assigned: If there is no promotion of the type assigned to the source code, look for eligible promotions that are not flagged for Required entry. If there is more than one, select the promotion based on the:

lowest priority number; if more than one,
latest start date; if more than one,
first one alphanumerically.

Using the Order Total to Evaluate Different Promotion Types

Determining the merchandise total when evaluating for promotions: In evaluating an order to see if it qualifies for a promotion based on merchandise total, provided you do not use Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison, the system:

Applies any BOGO promotion(s) and reduces the merchandise total based on the BOGO promotions if appropriate; next,
Applies any item category promotion(s) based on the newly-calculated merchandise total after subtracting any BOGO promotion discounts; then,
Applies any additional promotions based on the merchandise total after applying the BOGO and item category promotions, but ignoring the effects of any other promotion types. For example, if the order qualifies for a freight promotion based on merchandise total, and also qualifies for an order promotion that discounts the merchandise total, the freight promotion applies based on the total before applying the order promotion.

Example:

BOGO promotion: Buy five pencil sets, get one 50% off

Item category promotion: Buy $50.00 in item category UTN, get $10.00 off

Order promotion: 20% off $50.00 order total

Freight promotion: free shipping on orders over $80.00

Order includes six pencil sets, each on a separate order line for $10.00 each, plus four sticker sets at $10.00 each = $100.00 merchandise total. The pencil sets are in item category UTN, but the sticker sets are not.

1. BOGO promotion: Reduces one of the pencil sets by 50%, to $5.00. New merchandise total: $95.00.

2. Item category promotion: Prorates $10.00 discount across five remaining pencil sets currently priced at $10.00, reducing them to $8.00 each; the line discounted through the BOGO promotion is not eligible for further discounting. The sticker sets are not discounted. New merchandise total: $85.00.

3. Order promotion: Applies 20% discount to the four sticker sets, reducing them to $8.00 each. New merchandise total: $77.00 (nine lines at $8.00 plus one line at $5.00).

4. Freight promotion: Changes freight charges to zero. Order still meets qualifying dollar total of $80.00 based on merchandise total before applying order promotion.

Applying order or tiered promotions after BOGO or item category promotions: If you use the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) system control value to prevent further discounting when you apply a BOGO or item category promotion, these order lines are not eligible for discounting through an order or tiered promotion. However, if you set up an order or tiered promotion to apply a discount through a negative additional charge code, this negative additional charge can still apply to the order.

Example: An item category promotion has discounted the items on an order and applied the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) to prevent further discounting. If there is also an order promotion offering a 10% discount without an additional charge code, the order lines that have been discounted through the item category promotion are not discounted any further. However, if the order promotion specifies an additional charge code, a negative additional charge for 10% of the merchandise total applies to the order.

Additional Notes about Promotion Selection Hierarchy

When selection takes place in order entry: An order's qualification for a promotion may change at any time during order entry. For example, an order's qualification for a promotion based on merchandise total may change as you add or delete items from the order, change quantities, select a different ship via, or apply a payment method.

Pop-up message: A promotion's pop-up message opens when you first enter the order's header information if the promotion is assigned in the Source Code table. However, this promotion may not actually apply to the order once you have completed entry if, for example, the promotion is qualified based on pay type and this pay type is not used on the order, or if another promotion of that type has a higher priority.

Manual entry of a promotion: Even when you enter a promotion at the Enter Promotion Code Screen, the promotion still might not apply to the order if, for example, the order does not meet the required merchandise amount for the promotion. In this situation, the screen does not necessarily display an error message indicating that the order does not qualify.

Order maintenance: The system does not evaluate the order for promotions in order maintenance or make any changes.

Applying Promotions through the Order API

Specifying one or more promotions: If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected, you can pass one or more promotions that are flagged for Required entry and apply them to the order through the Inbound Order XML Message (CWORDERIN). The Promotion attribute enables you to pass a single promotion, and the Promotion element enables you to pass a single promotion or multiple promotions. If the system control value is unselected, the order API ignores any promotions passed in the inbound order message.

For more information see the Order Administration Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2953017.1).

Promotion validation: If the order does not qualify for any of the promotions passed in the inbound order message and the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected, the order API does not apply the unqualified promotions; instead, it writes an Order Transaction History Message indicating that the promotion was not applied. The order does not go into error status. However, if a promotion code passed in the inbound order message is invalid, the order does go into error status.

Promotions logic: The order API uses the same logic as regular order entry to determine if an order qualifies for a promotion, and to select a promotion if the order qualifies for more than one of each type. See Promotion Logic and Processing for an overview.

Promotion discounts indicated in response message: If you receive the Detailed Order XML Response (CWORDEROUT) from the initial message (based on a response_type of D or E), the response message indicates the effects of any promotions applied to the order. Certain promotions are listed by name in the Promotion element, while others are indicated purely through the discounts or free gifts applied; see Discounted and Added Items in the CWOrderOut Response Message for more information.

Note:

The Promotion element is included in the CWORDEROUT response message only if the outbound XML version is 3.0 or higher (available in release 2.0 or later of Order Management System, or Order Administration).

For more information see the Order Administration Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2953017.1).

Promotions applied automatically: If promotions apply automatically because the Required entry flag is unselected, these promotions are indicated in the CWORDEROUT response message in the same way as promotions passed in the inbound order message.

Order Transaction History Message

You can review the promotions that apply to an order in standard order inquiry by selecting Order History to advance to the Display Order History Screen. The same information is available in streamlined order inquiry by selecting History.

This screen includes an UPSELL PROMO entry for each promotion that applies to the order, including the dollar amount, if any (Note: Discounts added as additional charges are listed as negative amounts, while prorated discounts are listed as positive amounts). The screen also includes an entry for any merchandise discount that is prorated.

Order promotions are included in the total listed as Total Prorated Order Level Discount. This total also includes any dollar discount by source or offer or manually-entered discount amount.

You can also review the additional charge codes used to apply promotion discounts, if any, by selecting Charges in standard order inquiry.

Note:

There may a rounding discrepancy on the total discount applied to an order when you prorate against the order lines if the amounts do not divide evenly. This discrepancy should be no more than a few pennies. The likelihood of the rounding discrepancy occurring increases if there are multiple discounts that apply to an order, such as a promotion percentage discount and a dollar discount by source.

System Control Values Related to Promotions

As part of your setup for using promotions, complete the following system control values:

Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63): Controls the ability to manually specify promotions to apply to an order.
Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65): Determines whether to apply promotion discounts to sale items.
Best Way Promotions (K44): Controls the logic the system uses to select the promotions to apply to an order.
Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45): Specifies the price override reason code that prevents an item discounted through an Item Category or BOGO promotion from being discounted by any subsequent promotions that apply to the order.
BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62): Specifies whether to use BOGO promotions by item category or by price code.
Search Promotions by Start Date in Order Entry (M27): Defines how promotions sort on the Select Promotion window in interactive Order Entry.

See the description of each system control value and the discussion under Promotion Logic and Processing for more information.

Cautions Related to Promotions

The following cautions provide more detail on how promotions apply to orders:

Cautions for All Promotions

Promotions as order credits: It is possible for some promotions to result in a net credit against an order if you set the promotion up as a discount amount. For example, if you set up a freight discount as a $5.00 credit, and the freight on the order is only $3.95, the promotion will represent free freight plus a $1.05 credit on the order.
Must qualify based on all criteria: Whether you set up a promotion to offer a single type of discount or override, or to offer a discount and override in combination, it is important to remember that the order must qualify for all criteria, in which case the order receives all of the promotion benefits. If the order fails to qualify for any of the promotion qualifiers, the order receives none of the promotion benefits.
Required price method: In order for promotions to apply to an order, the Price method for the source code on the order header must be set to Reg Plus Reprice.
When promotions are applied: If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is:
- unselected: the system evaluates the order for during repricing, the initial order accept, and the final order accept.
- selected: the system evaluates the order for promotions during repricing when you complete the Enter Promotion Code Screen and again at order acceptance.
Setting the Max qty too low: It is possible to set a maximum quantity that is less than the Qualifying quantity, or less than the Req qty for a BOGO promotion; however, in this situation, an order can never be eligible for the promotion discount.
Cannot override price matrix customer specials: Any order line that is repriced with the Price Override Reason for Price Matrix Customer Specials (K42) is not eligible for a promotion discount.
Tax calculation: If a promotion is prorated against the merchandise total, the tax amount is calculated based on the discounted merchandise price; otherwise, the tax amount is calculated based on the original item price because the discount appears as a negative additional charge.

Example:

If prorating: original item price = $10.00

price after applying discount = $9.00

tax = $.45 (5% of $9.00)

If not prorating: original item price = $10.00

discount appears as $1.00 negative additional charge; item price remains $10.00

tax = $.50 (5% of $10.00)

Pricing sequence: Discounts are applied to the order line price after all other price methods, except for a coupon percentage discount or a dollar discount by source code or offer. Also, unlike some other repricing options, repricing through an order promotion does not display a message on the screen and it is not described on the Work with Order Line Screen (Changing/Adding an Item).
Sale items excluded? The Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value controls whether to include sale items when prorating discounts. This system control value affects the discounting only for a percentage discount, or for a dollar discount if there is no additional charge code specified. See that system control value for more information and examples. The Sale item flag for the Item Offer or the Sale item flag for the SKU Offer indicates whether an item is a sale item.
Non-discountable items excluded from prorating and qualifying dollar total: Items that are flagged as non-discountable (based on the setting of the Discountable flag) are always excluded from prorating of discounts and from the qualifying dollar total.
Items excluded from qualifying quantity: The system does not include items in the qualifying quantity if they are:
- added to the order in sold out status
- added to the order at “no charge” (However, items added with a discount, such as through promotional pricing or by source, are still included)
- flagged as a Sale item flag for the Item Offer or the Sale item flag for the SKU Offer, if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected
- flagged as non-discountable (based on the setting of the Discountable flag)
- drop ship (freight and additional freight promotions only)
- identified as heavy items by on a ship via/item charge assignment through the Work with Ship Via/Item Screen (freight and additional freight promotions only)
No re-evaluation in order maintenance: The system does not evaluate whether the order still qualifies for the promotion if you make any changes in order maintenance. For example, if the order total decreases due to a cancellation and no longer meets the requirement for the promotion, the promotion is not automatically removed.

Caution for Order and Tiered Promotions

The following additional caution applies to order and tiered promotions that apply a discount to the order:

Manual price overrides: The system applies order discounts, regardless of whether they are prorated, even to items whose price you have overridden in order entry, with the exception of order lines using the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45).
Price override reason required for free items: The system applies the Price Override Code for Promotional Priced Lines (B61) when it adds a free item through a tiered promotion. If this system control value is blank, the system does not add the free item to the order.
Best price comparison: When you use Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison, if the calculated price for the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) is lower than the price after applying any promotions, the order line uses the lower price.

Cautions for Freight Promotions and Ship Via Overrides

The following additional cautions apply to freight promotions and other promotion types that apply a ship via override:

Freight overrides: An order is not eligible for a freight promotion if:
you set the Calculate freight field on the order header to unselected, or
you enter an override amount in the Freight override (current ship to) field on the Work with Order Ship to Properties Screen (Properties).
The customer is eligible for free freight through a loyalty program. See Loyalty Memberships for background.
Valid SCF/Ship Via required: In order for the ship via override to apply to an order, the override ship via must already be set up with the SCF on the order shipping address as a valid SCF/ship via combination. If the SCF/ship via is not valid combination, the ship via override does not apply to the order; additionally, if the ship via override is set up as part of a discount promotion (such as a freight discount promotion), the discount does not apply to the order either.

You use Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) to set up SCF/ship via combinations.

PO Boxes: If the override ship via does not accept a PO box as a valid delivery address, the ship via override does not take place on an order with a PO box; additionally, if the ship via override is set up as part of a discount promotion (such as a freight discount promotion), the discount does not apply to the order either.
If more than one qualifying promotion has a ship via override: If more than one promotion type that applies to the order includes a ship via override, the system uses the override of the last promotion in the following order:
Additional Freight
Freight
Order
Ship via override: The system applies the promotion’s ship via override to the order unless another ship via override takes precedence; see Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy for ship via overrides.

Cautions for One-Time-Use Promotions

Any type of promotion can be flagged for one-time use. Things to note:

If the promotion’s Use once flag is selected:
If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected: You can apply the promotion more than once only if you have authority under the Override One Time Use Promotion (J08) secured feature.
The ability to override the one-time-use option is available only in interactive order entry; the order API never applies a one-time-use promotion a second time for a customer.
If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is unselected, the system never applies the same one-time-use promotion twice for a customer, even if the promotion is passed in the CWOrderIn message. If the promotion is passed and has already been applied to a prior order, the system writes an Order Transaction History message such as Promotion 1TFRT not applied.

About the Customer Sold To Promo table: The system uses this table to track the orders on which customers used promotions flagged for one-time use. You can review these promotions for a customer at the Display One Time Use Promotions Screen in customer maintenance.

The Customer Sold To Promo record is not deleted when the order where the promotion was used is canceled, or the item(s) on the order sold out. It is possible to apply the promotion to an additional order only if the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected and you have authority under the Override One Time Use Promotion (J08) secured feature.
The Customer Sold To Promo record is initially created when you complete creation of a suspended order; however, the promotion is not applied, and the Customer Sold To Promo record is not created, when the order is in error.
The Customer Sold To Promo record is not retained if:
an order initially received through the order API is not ultimately accepted.
the order no longer qualifies for the one-time-use promotion at acceptance, so the promotion is removed.
you delete a suspended order from a batch or delete the batch.
Purging orders deletes the related Customer Sold To Promo records. See Purging Orders (MPOR).
Performing a customer merge/purge merges the Customer Sold To Promo records. See Working with Merge/Purge Sold-to Names (MMCS).

Cautions for BOGO Promotions by Item Category or Item

The following additional cautions apply to BOGO promotions by item category or item (if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to ITEM CATEGORY):

Sale or non-discountable items: The BOGO repricing does not apply to an order line for a Sale item or an item flagged as Non-discountable.
BOGO item quantity and item/SKU or quantity must match: A BOGO promotion set up to discount an existing line on the order does not apply if there is no order line with the correct quantity and item, SKU, or item category. For example, you set up a BOGO promotion as: buy five in an item category, get one at 50% off. An order includes three lines, each for two units within the item category. Because there is no eligible order line with a quantity of one, the BOGO promotion does not apply.
Confirming that the order qualifies for the promotion: The Enter Promotion Code Screen does not display an error message when you enter a BOGO promotion if the order does not currently qualify for the promotion based on the criteria set up at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item); however, if the order does not qualify when you accept the order, the promotion discount is not applied.

Important:

If you select the Allow multiples setting for any BOGO promotions, then the order line quantity should be 1 for every order line on an order that might be eligible for the promotion; otherwise, the BOGO promotion might not apply correctly. To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Default Order Quantity (B30) and Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.

Cautions for BOGO Promotions by Price Code

The following additional cautions apply to BOGO promotions by price code (if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE):

Sale or non-discountable items: The BOGO repricing does not apply to an order line for a Sale item or an item flagged as Non-discountable.
Order line quantity must be 1: If the order line quantity is greater than 1, the promotion might not apply correctly. To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Default Order Quantity (B30) and Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.
Only specific promotion variations are supported: See BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code for a listing of the specific options that are supported for BOGO promotions by price code.
BOGO quantity must meet the required amount: If the promotion specifies a Req amt, then the Req qty of qualifying items on the order must meet or exceed the Req amt within that quantity. For example, if the promotion specifies a Req amt of $500 and a Req qty of 1, and an order includes 2 qualifying items for $250 each, the order is not eligible for the promotion; it would need to include a single qualifying item for $500 or more to be eligible.
Discount is always based on or applied to the lower-priced item(s): BOGO promotions by price code require that any discount calculation be based on the lower-priced items within the total BOGO quantity, and applied to the lower-priced items if the discount is not prorated, regardless of whether the lower-priced item is in the qualifying Price code or the BOGO PC. For example:
- If the promotion specifies “buy one, get one 30% off,” the 30% discount is calculated based on the lower-priced item.
- If the promotion specifies “buy one, get $20 off one” and is not prorated, the $20 discount applies to the lower-priced item.

Cautions for Item Category Promotions

The following additional caution applies to item category promotions:

Confirming that the order qualifies for the promotion: The Enter Promotion Code Screen does not display an error message when you enter an item promotion and the order does not currently qualify for the promotion based on the item categories specified at the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen; however, if the order does not qualify when you accept the order, the promotion discount is not applied.

Work with Promotions Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review and work with promotions. See Working with Promotions (WPRO) for an overview of how promotions work, examples of each type, and setup instructions.

Additional screens: You can advance to the following screens from the Work with Promotions screen:

How to display this screen: Enter WPRO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Promotion Values option from a menu.

Note:

The system retains the last view you used in Work with Promotions; instead of advancing to the Work with Promotions screen, you may advance to the Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen or Work with Promotions by End Date Screen.

Promotions display on the Work with Promotions screen in ascending promotion code sequence; see Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen to display promotions in ascending start date sequence and see Work with Promotions by End Date Screen to display promotions in ascending end date sequence.

Field	Description
Promotion	A code to identify the promotion. Enter a full or partial promotion code to display promotions in ascending promotion code sequence, starting with your entry. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the promotion. Enter a full or partial description to display promotions that contain your entry. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Start Date	The date when the promotion first becomes effective. Enter a start date to display promotions whose start date is equal to or later than the date you entered. Note: This sort is available Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen only on the. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
End Date	The last date when the promotion is effective. Enter an end date to display promotions whose end date is equal to or later than the date you entered. Note: This sort is available only on the Work with Promotions by End Date Screen. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Type	The type of promotion. Valid values are: Additional freight BOGO Freight Item Category Order Tiered discount ' ' = messaging or reporting promotion Select a promotion type to display promotions assigned to that type. Optional.
Excl	Indicates whether you have specified item or item category exclusions for the promotion. N = There are currently no item or item category exclusions. Y = There is at least one item or item category exclusion. See Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen for more information.

Screen Options	Procedure
Create a promotion	Select Create to advance to the Create Promotion Screen.
Change a promotion	Select Change for a promotion to advance to the Change Promotion screen. For field descriptions, see Create Promotion ScreenYou can change all of the information except the Promotion code field.
Copy an existing promotion	Select Copy for a promotion to advance to the Copy Promotion Screen.
Delete a promotion	Select Delete for a promotion to delete it. You can also run the PURGEPR periodic function to delete completed promotions whose end date is equal to or earlier than a calculated purge date.
Display a promotion	Select Display for a promotion to advance to the Display Promotion screen. You cannot change any fields on this screen. For field descriptions, see the Create Promotion Screen.
Work with item/category exclusions	Select Item/Item Category Exclusions to advance to the Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen.
View promotions in ascending start date sequence	Select By Start Date to advance to the Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen. Note: This option is available only on the Work with Promotions by End Date Screen and Work with Promotions Screen.
View promotions in ascending end date sequence	Select By End Date to advance to the Work with Promotions by End Date Screen. Note: This option is available only on the Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen and Work with Promotions Screen.
View promotions in ascending promotion code sequence	Select By Promotion to advance to the Work with Promotions Screen. Note: This option is available only on the Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen and Work with Promotions by End Date Screen.
Create or delete promotions based on the information in the Promotion Upload table.	Select Upload to submit the program that creates or deletes promotions based on the information in the Promotion Upload table. See Promotion Upload for more information.

Create Promotion Screen

Purpose: To create a new promotion, Select Create at the Work with Promotions Screen.

Field	Description
Promotion code	A code used to group source codes together for reporting analysis, to display a pop-up message in order entry, to provide a merchandise, freight, or additional freight override, apply a negative additional charge, add a free or discounted item, or to override the ship via on an order. Numeric, 7 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Required entry	Indicates whether you must enter this promotion at the Enter Promotion Code Screen in interactive order entry or include it in the inbound order message for the order API in order to have the promotion apply to the order. Selected = If the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is: selected = the system does not evaluate the order to see if it qualifies for the promotion unless you enter the promotion code at the Enter Promotion Code Screen in interactive order entry or include it in the inbound order message for the order API unselected = this promotion cannot apply to any orders Unselected = The system evaluates the order to see if it qualifies for the promotion See Promotion Logic and Processing for more information on how the system determines whether to apply a promotion to an order.
Use once	Indicates whether the promotion can apply to more than one order for a customer. Selected = The promotion can apply just once for a customer; however, if the Allow Manual Entry of Promotion Code (I63) system control value is selected and you have authority to the Override One Time Use Promotion (J08) secured feature, you can apply the promotion to an additional order for the customer in order entry. Unselected = There is no restriction on how many times the promotion can apply for a customer. See Cautions for One-Time-Use Promotions.
Description	The description of the promotion code. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Start date	The date when the promotion becomes effective. This date might be used in the promotion selection hierarchy; see Promotion Logic and Processing for more information. Numeric 6 positions (in user date format), required.
End date	The last date when the promotion is effective. Numeric 6 positions (in user date format), required.
Pop up window messages 1-4	Up to four messages that appear in a pop-up window in order entry if this promotion is assigned to the source code on the order header. Alphanumeric, 4 lines, 30 positions each line; optional.
	Non-Messaging Promotion Values: Note: Complete the following fields only for promotions that apply some sort of a discount, free gift, or ship via override. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing for more information on setting up and using discount promotions.
Type	The type of discount to apply to orders that qualify for this promotion. Valid values are: Additional freight Freight Item Category Order Tiered discount BOGO ' ' = messaging or reporting promotion Note: You cannot change this setting once you have created the promotion. Required if you define any order promotion values.
Priority	The priority in which the system evaluates whether this promotion applies to an order. Lower numbers indicate higher priorities; that is, promotions with the lowest priority numbers are evaluated first. Depending on your setup, the system might not use the priority as a criterion to compare promotions; see Promotion Logic and Processing for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; required if you enter a discount Type.
Promotion ID	A code used to identify or group promotion codes for reporting and analysis. Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.
Qualifying source	Optionally, enter a source code that must be used on the order header for an order to qualify for the promotion. If you enter a qualifying source code here, you advance automatically to the Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen, where you have the option of entering additional qualifying source codes for the promotion. If you complete more than one qualifying field, the order must meet all criteria to qualify for the promotion. You can qualify a promotion by source code(s) or offer, but not both. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing. Note: Qualifying a promotion by source code differs from assigning the promotion to the source code to force a pop-up message to open or give the promotion highest priority in order entry. An error message indicates if you enter a source code that has the Exclude promotion field selected: `Source code flagged to exclude promotions`. Source codes are defined in and validated against the Source table. See Working with Source Codes (WSRC). You can qualify a promotion by source code or offer, but not both. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing.
	More than one qualifying source? If you have specified more than one qualifying source code for the promotion, the first qualifying source code alphanumerically is displayed in this field at the Change Promotion and Display Promotion screens and is display-only. If you flagged a source code to exclude promotions after assigning it as a qualifying source and it is the first qualifying source for the promotion alphanumerically, you will not be able to edit the promotion. The work around is to: change the setting of the Exclude promotion flag for the source code remove the source code as a qualifying source for the promotion reset the Exclude promotion flag for the source code Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional or display-only.
Qualifying offer	Optionally, enter the offer that must be associated with the source code used on the order header for an order to qualify for the promotion. If you complete more than one qualifying field, the order must meet all criteria to qualify for the promotion. Offer codes are defined in and validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR). You can qualify a promotion by source code or offer, but not both. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Qualifying pay type	Optionally, enter the pay type that must be used on an order for the order to qualify for the promotion. There can be other pay types used on the order as well. If you complete more than one qualifying field, the order must meet all criteria to qualify for the promotion. Pay type codes are defined in and validated against the Pay Type table. See Working with Pay Types (WPAY). When you use a pay type as a qualifier, you typically do not see the effect of the promotion until you accept the order. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Qualifying $ amount (Qualifying dollar amount)	Optionally, enter the total merchandise dollar amount an order must have to qualify for the promotion. The system evaluates the qualifying dollar amount after other repricing, such as price tables or an order-level discount percentage, is applied to the merchandise total. Exclusions: Non-discountable items are not included in the qualifying merchandise dollar total. If you complete more than one qualifying field, the order must meet all criteria to qualify for the promotion. Item category promotions: For an item category promotion, you can specify whether to evaluate an order based on the entire merchandise total on the order, or only the merchandise total within that specific category. See the Qualifying $ amount type, below. See About Discount Promotions and Promotion Logic and Processing. Not a valid entry for a tiered promotion or a BOGO promotion by price code. See the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for information on specifying qualifying dollar amounts for tiered promotions, and see the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen for more information on setting up BOGO promotions by price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Qualifying $ amount type	For an item category promotion, use this field to indicate whether the system uses the entire merchandise order total or quantity to determine whether the order qualifies for the promotion, or only the merchandise total or quantity within a specific item category. Valid values are: Item Categ = Only order lines for items assigned to a qualifying item category are included in determining the qualifying dollar amount, qualifying quantity, or maximum quantity. If the promotion specifies multiple item categories, each item category is evaluated independently. Example: The promotion offers a 10% discount for a Qualifying $ amount of $50.00 and two item categories, IT1 and IT2. There must be at least $50.00 worth of merchandise in IT1 for these order lines to receive the 10% discount; similarly, there must be at least $50.00 worth of merchandise in IT2 for these order lines to receive the discount. Order = All order lines (except for non-discountable items) are eligible to be included in the qualifying dollar amount, qualifying quantity, or maximum quantity, regardless of item category assignment. Example: The promotion offers an Item category special price for Qualifying quantity of 5 and a Maximum quantity of 10 for item categories IT1 and IT2. The order includes 7 order lines, including 5 for IT1 and 2 for IT2. Each of the order lines receives the special price. Note: When evaluating an order for an item category promotion that specifies a qualifying quantity or maximum quantity, the system treats a blank Qualifying $ amount type as if it is set to Order. Required for an Item category promotion if you specify a Qualifying $ amount.
Qualifying quantity	Optionally, enter the total unit quantity required for an order to qualify for the promotion. Example: If the qualifying quantity is five, an order can qualify with: a single order line with a quantity of five five order lines, each for a quantity of one any other combination of order lines with a total unit quantity of 5 or more Exclusions: The system does not include items in the qualifying quantity if they are: added to the order in sold out status added to the order at “no charge” (However, items added with a discount, such as through promotional pricing or by source, are still included) flagged as a Sale item flag for the Item Offer or the Sale item flag for the SKU Offer, if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) system control value is selected flagged as non-discountable (based on the setting of the Discountable flag) drop ship (freight and additional freight promotions only) identified as heavy items by on a ship via/item charge assignment through the Work with Ship Via/Item Screen (freight and additional freight promotions only) You cannot specify a qualifying quantity for a tiered or a BOGO promotion. The system does not prevent you from entering a qualifying quantity that is greater than the maximum quantity, below. Item category promotions: When you specify a qualifying quantity for an item category promotion, the system uses the Qualifying $ amount type to determine whether to include the total quantity of all items on the order to evaluate whether each item category qualifies for the promotion, or evaluates the quantity of each item category separately. For example, if the qualifying quantity is 5, the Qualifying $ amount type is set to Item Category, and the order includes 3 of IT1 and 6 of IT2, only IT2 qualifies for the promotion.
	If the Qualifying $ amount type is blank, then the system uses the quantity of all items on the order to determine whether each item category qualifies for the promotion. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Max qty	Optionally, enter the maximum number of units an order can have in order to qualify for the promotion. You might use this field to restrict orders from a promotion if they are already receiving a deep discount through a quantity break price or other pricing option. If the order exceeds the maximum quantity, none of the items on the order are eligible for the promotion. Which items on the order are included in evaluation? This total follows the same rules as those described for the Qualifying quantity, except that “no charge” items are included in the total when evaluating the order for the Max qty. How does the maximum work for item category promotions? If you set up an Item category promotion that also specifies a Qualifying $ amount (Qualifying dollar amount) with the Qualifying $ amount type set to Item Category, the evaluation for maximum quantity is against the item category rather than the whole order; however, the evaluation takes place at final order acceptance, and not at the Enter Promotion Code Screen. Note: The screen does not prevent you from entering a maximum quantity that is less than the Qualifying quantity, or less than the Req qty for a BOGO promotion; however, in this situation, an order can never be eligible for the promotion discount. Item category promotions: When you specify a maximum quantity for an item category promotion, the system uses the Qualifying $ amount type to determine whether to include the total quantity of all items on the order to evaluate whether each item category qualifies for the promotion, or evaluates the quantity of each item category separately. For example, if the maximum quantity is 10, the Qualifying $ amount type is set to Item Category, and the order includes 12 of IT1 and 7 of IT2, only IT2 qualifies for the promotion. If the Qualifying $ amount type is blank, then the system uses the quantity of all items on the order to determine whether each item category qualifies for the promotion. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
	Note: At this screen you can enter either a single qualifying customer number or customer group, but not both. To enter additional customer numbers or groups, use the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen. If you have previously entered any qualifying customer numbers or groups, the first customer number or group (but not both) is listed here; use the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen to review any additional customer numbers or groups.
Qualifying customer#	Optionally, use this field to restrict the promotion to one or more specific customers. If you enter a customer number in this field or a customer price group in the next field, you advance to the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen. At this subsequent screen, you can specify any number of individual customers or customer price groups. Customer numbers are defined in and validated against the Customer table. See Creating and Updating Sold-to Customers (WCST) for more information. If you have previously specified a qualifying customer and you specified this qualifier before specifying any customer price groups, this first customer is listed in this field and is display-only; otherwise, this field is blank. Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
Qualifying customer group	Optionally, use this field to restrict the promotion to one or more specific customer price groups. If you enter a customer price group in this field or a customer number in the previous field, you advance to the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen. At this subsequent screen, you can specify any number of individual customers or customer price groups. Customer price groups are defined in and validated against the Customer Price Group table. See Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG) for more information. If you have previously specified a qualifying customer price group, and you specified this qualifier before specifying any individual customer numbers, this first customer price group is listed in this field and is display-only; otherwise, this field is blank. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
First time buyer	Optionally, use this field to restrict the promotion to first-time customers. Valid values are: LTD orders: The promotion is available only if the customer placing the order has not placed any previous orders. A customer who has placed an order is not eligible, even if the order is subsequently canceled or if all items on the order are sold out; however, the customer is eligible if the previous order is still in suspended or error status, or if it consisted of a return processed as a new order with a negative quantity. LTD sales: The promotion is available only if the customer placing the order has not previously had an order shipment. A customer whose only previous orders have not yet been shipped, or if they consisted of a return processed as a new order with a negative quantity, is still eligible for the promotion. This qualifier applies to the customer placing the order only (customer sold-to); it does not apply to order recipients.
Continental USA only	Optionally, use this field to restrict a freight or additional freight promotion discount, or ship via override, to states in the continental U.S.A. Valid values are: selected = Promotion applies only when the shipping address is in the continental U.S.A. unselected = Promotion is not restricted to the continental U.S.A. Note: This option is available only for freight or additional freight promotions.
Qualifying via priority	Optionally, enter the priority that must be assigned to the ship via on the order header for the order to qualify for the promotion. The ship via priority is a one-position number that controls how the system allocates inventory to backorders or reserves inventory during Batch Reservation. Example: You can create a promotion to offer $.99 ground shipping for orders over $25.00, and use this field to specify the ship via priority for these ship vias. If the ship via changes for any reason before you accept the order and the current ship via’s priority does not match this setting, the system removes the promotion from the order. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA) for more information on setting up ship vias, and see Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a discussion on how the ship via on an order might be overridden in order entry. Numeric, 1 position; optional.
Item category special price	Indicates the price to apply for items within an item category specified at the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen for this promotion. Example: Enter 4.99 have the promotion discount all items within the item category to $4.99, regardless of their regular price. You can enter an Item category special price only for Item Category promotions; in this case, you do not enter a Discount amount or a Discount percent. Note: If there is an item on the order whose price is lower than the special price, the promotion does not change the price. For example, the special price is $4.99 and item AB100 is priced at $4.00: the promotion does not reprice the item. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Additional charge code	Optionally, enter an additional charge code to use when adding a non-prorated discount to an order. You should specify an additional charge code when: an order, tiered, or freight type discount should not be prorated a freight discount uses a discount amount or percentage (not a freight override amount or free freight) any additional freight discount applies to an order; all additional freight discounts use either a discount amount or percentage In these situations, the discount is added to the order as a negative additional charge using the code you specify here. Note: If you use an additional charge code to apply a discount against an order, this negative additional charge code reduces the total the customer pays even if you have used the Price Override Reason for Promotions (K45) to prevent additional discounting against the prices of the order lines. You cannot specify an additional charge code for an Item Category or BOGO promotion. Additional charge codes are defined in and validated against the Additional Charge table; see Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; may be optional or required, depending on other field settings.
Discount amount	The dollar discount amount to apply to the order: Order discount: This amount is prorated against the dollar value of order lines if you do not enter an additional charge code; otherwise, the discount is added to the order as a negative additional charge. Item category: This amount is prorated against the order lines in that item category (or categories). See Prorating Logic for more information on the prorating calculation. Freight or additional freight discount: This amount is added to the order as a negative additional charge. Not a valid entry for a tiered or BOGO promotion. See the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for information on specifying discount amounts for tiered promotions, and see the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for information on specifying discount amounts for BOGO promotions. Include sale item? The specified discount applies to sale items if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) is unselected. See that system control value for more information. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Discount percent	The percentage discount to apply to the items on the order. Order discount: This percentage is applied to each order line's unit price if you do not enter an additional charge code; otherwise, the total merchandise discount is added to the order as a negative additional charge. Item category: This percentage is applied to the unit price of each order line for the item category(ies). Freight or additional freight discount: This percentage of the freight or additional freight charge is added to the order as a negative additional charge. Include sale item? The specified discount applies to sale items if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) is unselected. See that system control value for more information. Not a valid entry for a tiered or BOGO promotion. See the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for information on specifying discount amounts for tiered promotions, and see the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for information on specifying discount amounts for BOGO promotions. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Freight override amount	The freight amount to charge on the order, overriding the freight charge based on the calculation methods that would normally apply. You use this field only for a freight discount. You cannot enter an additional charge code if you enter a freight override amount. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Free freight	Indicates whether to provide freight free of charge. You use this field only for a freight discount. Valid values are: selected = This is a free freight discount promotion unselected = This is not a free freight discount promotion You cannot enter an additional charge code if you enter Y in this field. Note: If the customer is eligible for free freight through a loyalty program, you cannot apply a promotion that includes free freight. See Loyalty Memberships for background.
Ship via override	Use this field to have the promotion replace the ship via on the order with the ship via you enter here. You can combine a ship via with an order, freight, or additional freight discount promotion, or set it up as the only discount/override for a freight or additional freight discount promotion. See Ship Via Override for information on how to set up a ship via override, and for some of the cautions to observe. The system applies the promotion ship via override to the order unless another ship via override takes precedence; see Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Not a valid entry for a BOGO, item category, or tiered promotion.
	Item Ship Via Override Item ship via overrides define the shippers that are eligible to ship an item to its destination. If the ship via override defined for the promotion is not a valid shipper for one or more of the items on the order, the system will not apply the ship via override from the promotion to the order. See Working with Item Ship Via Overrides. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Ship via country	The country eligible to receive the ship via override. Only orders you are shipping to this country will receive the ship via override, or any additional discounts included in the promotion. You use this field only for a ship via override. Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Not a valid entry for a BOGO, item category, or tiered promotion. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
From SCF	The first (lowest) SCF eligible to receive the ship via override. Only orders you are shipping to zip codes that fall within this SCF up to the To SCF will receive the ship via override, or any additional discounts included in the promotion. You use this field only for a ship via override. Not a valid entry for a BOGO, item category, or tiered promotion. SCF codes are defined in and validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). The system also requires that: a SCF/ship via record exists for the Ship via override; see Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) for background. the SCF is valid for the Ship via country, if specified; otherwise, for the Default Country for Customer Address (B17). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
To SCF	The last (highest) SCF eligible to receive the ship via override. Only orders you are shipping to zip codes that fall within the From SCF to this SCF will receive the ship via override, or any additional discounts included in the promotion. You use this field only for a ship via override. Not a valid entry for a BOGO, item category, or tiered promotion. SCF codes are defined in and validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). The system also requires that: a SCF/ship via record exists for the Ship via override; see Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) for background. the SCF is valid for the Ship via country, if specified; otherwise, for the Default Country for Customer Address (B17). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Completing the Create or Change Promotion Screen

Completing this screen: Once you create or change a promotion, you might advance to the:

Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen: if you have specified a Qualifying source.
Work with Promotion Discounts Screen: if you are setting up a Tiered Discount or Free Gift promotion.
Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen: if you have specified a Qualifying customer# or Qualifying customer group.
Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen: if you are setting up an Item Category Discount promotion.
Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item): if you are setting up a BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item promotion.

Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review and work with the qualifying source codes for a promotion. An order qualifies for a promotion if one of the source codes listed is on the order header, and the order also meets all other criteria specified at the Create Promotion Screen or the Change Promotion screen. See Promotion Logic and Processing for a discussion.

How to display this screen: Complete the Create Promotion Screen, Change Promotion screen, Copy Promotion Screen, or the Display Promotion screen for a promotion that has a Qualifying source.

Note:

If you advance to this screen from the Display Promotion screen, all fields are display-only.

Field

Description

Promotion code

The code identifying the promotion you are currently working with. The description is to the right.

Code: alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Source code

A source code that must be used on the order header for an order to qualify for the promotion. The first qualifying source code alphanumerically is displayed in the Qualifying source field on the Change Promotion screen and the Display Promotion screen.

Adding a qualifying source: Enter a source code in the Source code field at the top of the screen to add it as a qualifying source code for the promotion.

An error message indicates if you enter a source code that has the Exclude promotion field selected: Source code flagged to exclude promotions.

Note:

Qualifying a promotion by source code differs from assigning the promotion to the source code in order to force a pop-up message to open or give the promotion highest priority in order entry.

Source codes are defined in and validated against the Source file. See .Working with Source Codes (WSRC)

Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.

Description

The description of the source code.

Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Instructions: Enter a source code in the Source code field to add it as a qualifying source code for the selected promotion.

After you complete this screen, you might advance to a subsequent screen. See Completing the Create or Change Promotion Screen for more information.

Work with Promotion Discounts Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to identify the discounts or free items available for each tier in a tiered promotion, and the required merchandise amount for each. See Tiered Discount or Free Gift for more information on how tiered promotions work.

How to display this screen: Complete the Create Promotion Screen, Change Promotion screen, Copy Promotion Screen, or the Display Promotion screen for a tiered promotion.

Field	Description
Promotion code	The code identifying the promotion you are currently working with. The description is to the right. Code: alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only. Description: alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Merch amount	The total merchandise value required for an order to qualify for this tier of a promotion. The system evaluates the qualifying dollar amount after other repricing, such as price tables or an order-level discount percentage, is applied to the merchandise total. If there are multiple shipping addresses on the order, this is the merchandise total required for the shipping address. Highest tier only: When assigning the promotion to an order, the system assigns the highest tier for which the order qualifies. For example, if there is a discount of 10% for a merchandise amount of $50.00, and a discount of 15% for a merchandise amount of $75.00, an order with a merchandise total of $75.00 receives a 15% discount. Which items count toward total? When evaluating an order to see if it meets the required merchandise total, the system does not include non-discountable items (based on the setting of the Discountable flag for the item). Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
	Enter either a dollar discount, percent discount, or free item for each tier.
Dollar discount	The dollar discount amount to apply to the order when the merchandise value meets the requirement for this tier but not for the next tier. This amount is prorated against the dollar value of order lines if you do not enter an additional charge code at the Create Promotion Screen; otherwise, the discount is added to the order as a negative additional charge. See Prorating Logic for more information on the prorating calculation. Include sale item? The specified discount applies to sale items if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) is unselected. See that system control value for more information. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Percent discount	The percentage to discount the merchandise on the order when the merchandise value meets the requirement for this tier but not for the next tier. This percentage is applied proportionally to each order line's extended price if the discount is prorated (that is, you do not enter an additional charge code); otherwise, the total merchandise discount is added to the order as a negative additional charge. Include sale item? The specified discount applies to sale items if the Exclude Sale Item When Prorating Discounts (I65) is unselected. See that system control value for more information. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Free item	The free item to add to the order when the merchandise value meets the requirement for this tier but not for the next tier. The system adds the item to the order after you select the Reprice option or accept the order. Price override reason: The system applies the Price Override Code for Promotional Priced Lines (B61) to the order line when it adds the free gift. If this system control value is blank, the free gift is not added to the order. Note: If you are using Promotion Hierarchy: Best Way and an order qualifies for multiple tiered promotions offering free gifts, the promotion offering the free gift with the highest value applies to the order. Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional. SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.

Option	Procedure
Switch between the display of existing tiers and enterable fields to add new promotion tiers	Select Change to switch between ADD and CHANGE mode. Options in ADD mode: This is the default mode when you advance to this screen from the Create Promotion Screen. In this mode, you can add new tiers for the promotion. If a tier already exists for the Merch amount specified for your entry, the system displays an error message. Options in CHANGE mode: This is the default mode when you advance to this screen from the Change Promotion screen. In this mode, you can: review existing tiers for the promotion change the type of discount for a Merch amount (Dollar discount, Percent discount, or Free item), including changing the value for each field or switching from one type of discount to another. You cannot change the Merch amount; instead, you need to delete it and create a new tier. delete a tier by selecting Delete for it

Option

Procedure

Switch between the display of existing tiers and enterable fields to add new promotion tiers

Select Change to switch between ADD and CHANGE mode.

Options in ADD mode: This is the default mode when you advance to this screen from the Create Promotion Screen. In this mode, you can add new tiers for the promotion. If a tier already exists for the Merch amount specified for your entry, the system displays an error message.

Options in CHANGE mode: This is the default mode when you advance to this screen from the Change Promotion screen. In this mode, you can:

review existing tiers for the promotion
change the type of discount for a Merch amount (Dollar discount, Percent discount, or Free item), including changing the value for each field or switching from one type of discount to another. You cannot change the Merch amount; instead, you need to delete it and create a new tier.
delete a tier by selecting Delete for it

Copy Promotion Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to copy an existing promotion.

How to display this screen: Select Copy for a promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen.

To copy: Complete the Promotion code field and change any desired settings from the original promotion. See Create Promotion Screen for field descriptions, and see Working with Promotions (WPRO) for information about setting up and using promotions.

When you copy a promotion with additional sub tables, you advance to a subsequent screen for each sub-table you would need to copy, so that you can revise the sub-table as needed. For example, when you copy a tiered promotion, you advance to the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen, where you can revise the copied tiers as needed. See Completing the Create or Change Promotion Screen for a listing of additional screens.

Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to specify the individual customers or customer price groups that are eligible for a promotion. The promotion is available only to the specific customers or members of the price groups you specify here.

How to display this screen: Enter a customer number or a customer price group at the Create Promotion Screen or the Change Promotion screen.

Note:

You can also advance to this screen in display mode by advancing from the Display Promotion screen.

Field	Description
Promotion code	The promotion that you are creating, or that you selected at the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Group	Enter a customer price group code to make members of the group eligible for the promotion. Group codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Price Group table. See Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG) for more information. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Customer	Enter a customer number to make that customer eligible for the promotion. Customer numbers are defined in and validated against the Customer table. See Creating and Updating Sold-to Customers (WCST) for more information. Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
Name	The name of the customer or the description of the customer price group. First 30 positions of customer last name, first name, and company name: If the customer has a last and first name, this information is displayed first; then if the customer has a company name, the company name follows the text ATTN. Otherwise, if the customer has just a company name, the company name is displayed. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Instructions: Enter a customer price group code or enter a customer number to add a record to the Promotion Customer table. If you enter a customer or price group in error, or if the customer or price group is no longer eligible for the promotion, you can Delete it.

Note:

You cannot scan for additional records at this screen by entering information in search fields; pressing Enter adds your entry to the Promotion Customer table.

Reviewing through customer maintenance: You can also view the promotions associated with a specific customer or customer group through Creating and Updating Sold-to Customers (WCST). See the Display Customer Promotions Screen and the Display Customer Price Group Promotions Screen.

Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to specify the item categories eligible for an item category promotion.

How to display this screen: Complete the Create Promotion Screen or Change Promotion screen for an item category promotion.

Note:

When you advance to this screen from the Display Promotion screen, it is display-only.

For more information: See Item Category Discount for an overview of item category promotions.

Field	Description
Promotion code	The promotion code you are creating, or selected to change or display from the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Category	Enter an item category in this field to specify it for the promotion. An item must be assigned to a category specified here in order to qualify for the promotion. Item category assignment is at the SKU level, and you specify an item category assignment at the Create Item (Base Information) Screen (non-SKU’d item) or the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen (SKU’d item). Item category codes are defined in and validated against the Item Category table. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG) for more information. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required to add a category.
Description	The description of the item category. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Option	Procedure
Add a qualifying item category	Enter an item category code in the Category field.
Delete a qualifying item category	Select the Delete option for an item category.

Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item)

Purpose: Use this screen to work with the discounts or free gifts to apply through a BOGO (Buy One/Get One) promotion based on item category or item. A BOGO promotion first identifies one or more qualifying order line (based on item category, base item, or SKU) and then identifies the type of discount to apply to a matching order line.

For more information: See BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Item Category or Item for more information on how BOGO promotions apply to orders and on possible setup options.

How to display this screen: Complete the Create Promotion Screen or Change Promotion screen for a BOGO promotion. When you advance to this screen from the Display Promotion screen, all fields are display-only.

Note:

You advance to this screen only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY; otherwise, if the system control value is set to PRICE CODE, you advance to the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen.

Field	Description
Promotion	The promotion code you are creating, or selected to change or display from the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
	Use the following fields to specify an item category, the base item of a SKU’d item, a particular SKU, or a non-SKU’d item to include in the BOGO promotion.
Item category	Optionally, enter an item category in this field to set up a BOGO promotion. You can set up BOGO promotions for item categories, for all SKU’s of a SKU’d item, or for specific non-SKU’d items or SKU’s. If you set up a promotion based on item category, you cannot select the Allow mult flag or set the Free flag to Free Auto Add; these options are available only when you set up the promotion for a non-SKU’d item or an individual SKU of a SKU’d item. About item categories: Item category assignment is at the SKU level, and you specify an item category assignment at the Create Item (Base Information) Screen (non-SKU’d item) or the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen (SKU’d item). Item category codes are defined in and validated against the Item Category table. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG) for more information. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required to add a category.
Item	Optionally, enter an item code in this field to include it in the BOGO promotion. If the item has SKU’s, you can enter a particular SKU to restrict the BOGO promotion to that SKU only; or you can leave the SKU fields blank to apply the promotion to all SKU’s on the order. If you set up a promotion based on all SKU’s of a SKU’d item, you cannot select the Allow mult flag or set the Free flag to Free Auto Add; these options are available only when you set up the promotion for a non-SKU’d item or an individual SKU of a SKU’d item. Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; required to set up a promotion based on item. SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Req qty (required quantity)	The quantity of the items in the item category, or of the particular item or SKU, required for the order to qualify for the promotion. Numeric, 5 positions; required.
BOGO qty	The quantity of the item to receive the BOGO discount, to be set to no charge, or to be added at no charge. Numeric, 5 positions; required.
Free	Indicates whether the BOGO order line is discounted, changed to no charge, or added automatically at no charge. No = The item is discounted but not free Free = The promotion changes an existing item on the order to no charge Free auto add = The system adds an item to the order at no charge. This option is available only when your entry is for a non-SKU’d item, or for a specific SKU of a SKU’d item.
Allow mult (allow multiples)	Indicates whether to apply the discount more than once if the ordered quantity is a multiple of the qualifying quantity. Selected = Orders can qualify for this BOGO discount multiple times. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy five, get one free,” selecting this field enables the customer to also buy ten, get two free; buy 15, get three free; and so on. Unselected = Apply this BOGO discount once only per order. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy five, get one free,” the customer still receives the BOGO discount on just one unit even if the order includes ten, 15, or more units. Note: Allowing multiples is supported only for BOGO discounts based on a non-SKU’d item or a specific SKU of an item. IMPORTANT: If you select the Allow multiples setting for any BOGO promotions, then the order line quantity should be 1 for every order line on an order that might be eligible for the promotion; otherwise, the BOGO promotion might not apply correctly. To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Default Order Quantity (B30) and Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.
	Provided you have not set up the BOGO discount as free, use one of the following fields to specify a discount percentage, discount dollar amount, or discount price.
Disc %	The percentage discount to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy two, get one at 25% off, you enter 25.00 here. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Disc $	The per-unit discount amount to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy five, get two at $1.00 off, you enter 1.00 here. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price	The override price to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy eight, get one at $7.99, you enter 7.99 here. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Option	Procedure
Add a BOGO discount entry	Complete the fields at the top of the screen, including: an Item category OR an Item and, optionally, a SKU the Req qty the BOGO qty A setting for the Free field Optionally, select the Allow mult flag if the entry is not for an item category Disc % OR Disc $ OR Price if the BOGO is not free See the field descriptions above for more information. Note: You cannot scan for additional records at this screen by entering information in search fields; pressing Enter adds your entry to the Promotion Item Exclusion table.
Change an existing BOGO discount entry	Select Change for an entry to advance to the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item).
Delete a BOGO discount entry	Select Delete for an entry to delete it from the promotion.

Option

Procedure

Add a BOGO discount entry

Complete the fields at the top of the screen, including:

an Item category OR an Item and, optionally, a SKU
the Req qty
the BOGO qty
A setting for the Free field
Optionally, select the Allow mult flag if the entry is not for an item category
Disc % OR Disc $ OR Price if the BOGO is not free

See the field descriptions above for more information.

Note:

You cannot scan for additional records at this screen by entering information in search fields; pressing Enter adds your entry to the Promotion Item Exclusion table.

Change an existing BOGO discount entry

Select Change for an entry to advance to the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item).

Delete a BOGO discount entry

Select Delete for an entry to delete it from the promotion.

Change BOGO Discount Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change an existing entry for a BOGO promotion based on item category or item. At this screen, you can change only the benefits of the entry; you cannot change the qualifying item category, item, SKU, or required quantity. To change this information, delete the BOGO entry at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) and enter a new one.

This screen is available only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to ITEM CATEGORY.

How to display this screen: Select Change for an entry at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item).

Field	Description
Promotion	The promotion code you are creating, or selected to change or display from the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Item category	The item category, if any, you selected at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item	The item and SKU, if any, you selected at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item). Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only. SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Req qty (required quantity)	The quantity of the items in the item category, or of the particular item or SKU, required for the order to qualify for the promotion. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
BOGO qty	The quantity of the item to receive the BOGO discount to be set to no charge, or to be added at no charge. Optionally, enter a different quantity to change it. Numeric, 5 positions; required.
Free	Indicates whether the BOGO order line is discounted, changed to no charge, or added automatically at no charge. No = The item is discounted but not free Free = The promotion changes an existing item on the order to no charge Free auto add = The system adds an item to the order at no charge. This option is available only when your entry is for a specific item, or a SKU of a SKU’d item.
Allow mult (allow multiples)	Indicates whether to apply the discount to the BOGO order line more than once if the ordered quantity is a multiple of the qualifying quantity. Selected = Orders can qualify for this BOGO discount multiple times. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy five, get one free,” selecting this field enables the customer to also buy ten, get two free; buy 15, get 3 free; and so on. Unselected = Apply this BOGO discount once only per order. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy five, get one free,” the customer still receives the BOGO discount on just one unit even if the order includes ten, 15, or more units. Note: Allowing multiples is supported only for BOGO discounts based on a non-SKU’d item or a specific SKU of an item. IMPORTANT: If you select the Allow multiples setting for any BOGO promotions, then the order line quantity should be 1 for every order line on an order that might be eligible for the promotion; otherwise, the BOGO promotion might not apply correctly. To help ensure that the order line quantity is always 1, you can set both the Default Order Quantity (B30) and Maximum Order Quantity (C60) system control values to 1.
	Provided you have not set up the BOGO discount as free, use one of the following fields to specify a discount percentage, discount dollar amount, or discount price.
Disc %	The percentage discount to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy two, get one at 25% off, you enter 25.00 here. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Disc $	The per-unit discount amount to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy five, get two at $1.00 off, you enter 1.00 here. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price	The override price to apply to the BOGO order line. For example, if the promotion is buy eight, get one at $7.99, you enter 7.99 here. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with the discount or free gift to apply through a BOGO (Buy One/Get One) promotion based on price code. A BOGO promotion first identifies one or more qualifying order lines (based on price code, base item, or SKU) and then identifies the type of discount to apply to a matching order line.

Single discount or free gift: This screen enables you to set up only a single discount or free gift for the promotion. If a discount or free gift already exists for the promotion, it is displayed in the lower portion of the screen. You can select Change or Display to review the details.

For more information: See Working with Price Codes (WPCD) for information on setting up price codes, and see Assigning Price Codes (APCD) for information on assigning price codes to items.

Note:

You advance to this screen only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE; otherwise, you advance to the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item).

Important:

The available options for configuring a BOGO promotion by price code are described under BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code. Using a different configuration option may produce unintended results when the promotion applies to an order.

Field	Description
Promotion	The promotion code you are creating, or selected to change or display from the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
	Use the following fields to specify a price code, the base item of a SKU’d item, a particular SKU, or a non-SKU’d item that qualifies an order for the BOGO promotion.
Price code	The price code that items must be assigned to in order to qualify for the promotion. Defined in and validated against the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions; required if you do not specify an item as a qualifier.
Item	The required item for the promotion. Defined in and validated against the Item table. You can enter either an item or a price code as a qualifier. Note: Using an item as a qualifier for a BOGO promotion by price code is not currently supported. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; required if you do not specify a price code as a qualifier.
SKU (unlabeled fields to the right of the Item field)	Optionally, use the SKU fields to identify a particular SKU of the item, if any, required for the promotion. Defined in and validated against the SKU table. Note: Using an item as a qualifier for a BOGO promotion by price code is not currently supported. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
	Use either the Req amt and Req qty fields, or both fields in combination, to specify the total unit quantity or dollar value required of the price code or item to qualify for the promotion.
Req amt	Optionally, enter the required total dollar value of the required items from the specified price code. If you specify a required amount, the required quantity must meet or exceed this amount. Example: You specify a price code of 123, a required amount of $500.00, and a required quantity of 1. The order needs to include 1 unit assigned to price code 123 whose dollar value is $500.00 or more. The order does not qualify if it includes 5 units whose combined total dollar value is $500, since the requirement must be met within the 1 unit specified in the Req qty field. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional if you specify a required quantity.
Req qty (required quantity)	The quantity of the items assigned to the price code required for the promotion. See the Req amt field, above for more information. Numeric, 5 positions; optional if you specify a required amount.
	Use the remaining fields to specify the discount, special price, or free item available to qualifying orders. Any discounts apply to the lowest-priced items on the order.
BOGO qty	The quantity of the items assigned to the BOGO price code to receive the BOGO discount or special price or to be set to no charge. If you select the Prorate flag, this is the quantity of the item used to calculate the total discount to prorate across the required quantity and the BOGO quantity. If you want to make the promotion available to a required merchandise amount of a specified price code without specifying a required quantity, set this field to 99999. For example, set the Req amt to $500 and set this field to 99999 for a promotion that provides a discount to a total purchase of $500 within a specified price code. Numeric, 5 positions; required.
BOGO price code	The price code identifying the items eligible for the discount, special price, or to be set to no charge. Required if you do not specify an Auto add item. Can be the same as the qualifying Price code. Defined in and validated against the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions; required if you do not specify an Auto add item.
Disc %	The discount percentage to apply to the BOGO quantity, or to use when calculating the total discount to apply against the required quantity and the BOGO quantity if the Prorate field is selected. Required if you do not specify a discount dollar amount or price, or if the Free field is not set to Free or Free auto add. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Disc $	The total discount amount to apply to the BOGO quantity, or to prorate against the required quantity and the BOGO quantity if the Prorate field is selected. Required if you do not specify a discount percentage or price, or if the Free field is not set to Free or Free auto add. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Price	The discounted price to apply to the BOGO quantity. If the Prorate flag is selected, The system subtracts this price from the price currently on the order line, and prorates the difference across the required quantity and the BOGO quantity. For example, if both order lines are currently priced at $10.00, the Price specified here is $6.00, and the Prorate flag is selected, the system subtracts $6.00 from $10.00, and then prorates the result ($4.00) across the 2 order lines, resulting in a price of $8.00 for each. Required if you do not specify a discount percentage or amount, or if the Free field is not set to Free or Free auto add. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Prorate	Indicates whether to prorate the total discount applied through the promotion: Selected = prorate the total discount for the promotion across the required quantity and the BOGO quantity or free item Unselected = apply the entire discount to the BOGO quantity or the free item
Allow mult	Indicates whether to apply the promotion multiple times if the order includes a sufficient required and BOGO quantity: Selected = Orders can qualify for this BOGO discount multiple times if the number of qualifying items are multiples of the Req qty plus the BOGO qty. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy one, get one free,” selecting this field enables the customer to also buy two, get two free; buy three, get three free; and so on. Unselected = Apply this BOGO discount once only per order. For example, if the promotion specifies “buy one, get one free,” the customer still receives the BOGO discount on just one unit even if the order includes four, six, or more units.
Free	Indicates whether the BOGO order line is discounted, changed to no charge, or added automatically at no charge. No = The item is discounted but not free. With this setting, you need to specify the BOGO qty, BOGO price code, and either the Disc %, Disc $, or Price. Free = The promotion changes the price of an item on the order to no charge. With this setting, you need to specify the BOGO qty and BOGO price code, but no other discount options. Free auto add = The system adds the Auto add item to the order at no charge. With this setting, you need to specify the Auto add item and a SKU if the item has SKUs. The system adds a unit of the item to the order regardless of whether the item is already on the order. Note: If the Prorate flag is selected, the price of the free item is prorated across the Req qty and the free item.
Auto add item	Indicates the item to add to the order automatically at no charge. You can specify an auto-add item only if the Free field is set to Free auto add; in this case, the item is required, as well as a SKU if the item has SKUs. Note: This field is labeled Auto item at the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen and the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen (Display Mode). Item: 12 positions; required if the Free field is set to Free auto add. SKU: three 4-position fields; required if the item has SKUs.

Option	Procedure
Create a BOGO discount promotion by price code	See the field descriptions above for more information and BOGO (Buy One/Get One) Discount or Free Gift by Price Code for more information. Note: You can create only one discount for a BOGO promotion by price code.
Change the existing BOGO discount promotion	Select Change for the existing promotion to advance to the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen. Each field on this screen is described above.
Display the existing BOGO discount	Select Display for the existing promotion to advance to the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen (Display Mode). Each field on this screen is described above.

BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review or change the existing discount set up for a BOGO promotion by price code.

How to display this screen: Select Change for the existing discount at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen.

For more information: See the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen for field descriptions.

BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen (Display Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to review the existing discount set up for a BOGO promotion by price code.

How to display this screen: Select Display for the existing discount at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen, or select Display for a BOGO promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen and click OK through the displayed screens.

For more information: Each field on this screen is display-only. See the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen for field descriptions.

Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with items and item categories that are excluded from receiving an order, tiered, item category, or BOGO promotion.

Things to note about item and item category exclusions:

Excluded items still included as qualifiers: Even though the system does not apply a percentage discount or prorated dollar discount amount against the items or item categories you specify here, they are still included when determining whether the order qualifies for the promotion based on the Qualifying $ amount, Qualifying qty, and Max qty specified for the promotion, provided the order does not consist entirely of excluded items or item categories.

Example: A promotion requires a Qualifying $ amount of $50.00 and an order includes two lines: one for an excluded item with an extended price of $20.00, and one for a non-excluded item with an extended price of $35.00. The order qualifies for the promotion based on the merchandise total of $55.00, even though that total is partially based on an excluded item, although the discount does not apply to the excluded item.

Order must include at least one non-excluded item: Even though the excluded items or item categories are included in the qualifiers, an order still cannot receive the promotion if all of the items on the order are excluded.
Discount tier based on entire merchandise total: When a tiered promotion specifies a percentage discount, the percentage that applies is based on the qualifying merchandise total.

Example: An order includes two lines: one for an excluded item with an extended price of $20.00, and one for a non-excluded item with an extended price of $20.00. The promotion specifies a 10% discount for a merchandise total of $20.00, and a 15% discount for a merchandise total of $40.00. The system applies a 15% discount to the non-excluded item based on the merchandise total of $40.00, resulting in a discount amount of $3.00.

Freight and additional freight promotions: You cannot set up item/category exclusions for freight or additional freight promotions.

How to display this screen: Select Item/Item Category Exclusions for a promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen.

Field	Description
Promotion code	The promotion that you are creating, or that you selected at the Work with Promotions Screen. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only
Promotion description (unlabeled field to the right of the promotion code)	The description of the promotion. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Category	Enter an item category code to exclude items in the category from the promotion. Category codes are defined in and validated against the Item Category table. See Working with Item Category Codes (WITG) for more information. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Item	Enter an item code to exclude the item from the promotion. Note: You cannot specify an individual SKU of an item to exclude. If you enter a SKU’d item, all SKU’s of the item are excluded. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM) for more information. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.

Instructions: Enter an item category or enter an item code to add a record to the Promotion Item Exclusion table. If you enter an item category or item in error, or if the item or item category is no longer excluded for the promotion, you can delete it.

Note:

You cannot scan for additional records at this screen by entering information in search fields; pressing Enter adds your entry to the Promotion Item Exclusion table.

Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review and work with promotions in ascending start date sequence. Within start date, promotions sorts in ascending promotion code sequence. See Working with Promotions (WPRO) for an overview of how promotions work, examples of each type, and setup instructions.

How to display this screen: Enter WPRO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Promotion Values option from a menu.

Note:

The system retains the last view you used in Work with Promotions; instead of advancing to the Work with Promotions by Start Date screen, you may advance to the Work with Promotions Screen or Work with Promotions by End Date Screen.

For more information: See the Work with Promotions Screen for a description of the fields on this screen and the available screen options.

Work with Promotions by End Date Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review and work with promotions in ascending end date sequence. Within end date, promotions sorts in ascending promotion code sequence. See Working with Promotions (WPRO) for an overview of how promotions work, examples of each type, and setup instructions.

How to display this screen: Enter WPRO in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Promotion Values option from a menu.

Note:

The system retains the last view you used in Work with Promotions; instead of advancing to the Work with Promotions by End Date screen, you may advance to the Work with Promotions Screen or Work with Promotions by Start Date Screen.

For more information: See the Work with Promotions Screen for a description of the fields on this screen and the available screen options.

Promotion Upload

Purpose: Use the promotion upload to create or delete promotions and related tables based on the information in the Promotion Upload table.

You can process the upload by:

Creating a Promotion Upload text file. See below for information on file contents.
Populating the Promotion Upload table with the contents of the file by:
- Using the File Storage API to upload the file contents to the FILE_STORAGE table, and then running the UPPROMO Upload Promotion Code File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter PRMUPLD) periodic function to populate the Promotion Upload table, or
- Using the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the records in the file to the Promotion Upload table.
  
  See Fields Used in the Promotion Upload by Record Type for a sample record of each type of promotion you can upload.
Using the contents of the Promotion Upload table to create or update promotions by:
- selecting Upload at the Work with Promotions screen in Working with Promotions (WPRO), or
- submitting the PRMOUPL Create or Delete Promotions periodic function (Program name PRMOUPL). See How to Schedule a Job for information on how to schedule when the system executes a periodic process.

When you submit the update to the promotion records:

For each Promotion Upload record that is not in error, the upload creates the specified record in the Promotion or related table and deletes the Promotion Upload record.
For each Promotion Upload record in error, the upload sets the Processed Flag to E and updates the Error Desc field.

Note:

The upload does not delete records in error from the table or attempt to process them again unless the Processed Flag and Error Desc fields are cleared.

The upload generates the Promotion Upload Error Records Report regardless of whether there are any errors.
The upload then clears the PROMOTION_CACHE, which caches Promotion BOGO, Promotion Item Category, and Promotion Source tables. It does not clear the PROMOTION_LIST_CACHE, which caches the Promotion Customer and Promotion Item Exclusion tables. See Caching for background.

The discussion of the promotion upload in this topic includes:

General Rules for Promotion Uploads

Creation: You can use the upload to create a record in the Promotion table or any of the related tables:

Promotion BOGO: see Promotion Creation (PRM)
Promotion BOGO by Price Code: see Promotion BOGO Creation (PRB)
Promotion Customer: see Promotion BOGO by Price Code Creation (PBP)
Promotion Discount: see Promotion Discount Creation (PMD)
Promotion Item Category: see Promotion Item Category Creation (PIC)
Promotion Item Exclusion: see Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE)
Promotion Source: see Promotion Source Creation (PRS)

Deletion: You can use the upload to delete a record in the Promotion table and all its related records. The upload does not provide an option to delete a record in a related table without deleting the Promotion record itself.

Update: It is not possible to update a record through the upload.

Note:

To leave any field in the upload file blank, pass a space in an alphanumeric field and a 0 in a numeric field so that the file can be processed without errors. Leaving a field with no space or 0 is interpreted as null in the database and causes errors.

Promotion Upload Table (PRMUPLD)

The following is a complete list of the fields in the Promotion Upload table. The table includes fields used for all possible record types, creating records in the Promotion table and all related tables.

For more information: See:

Field	Attributes	Description
Company	numeric, 3 positions	The company where the record should be created or deleted. Defined in and validated against the Company table; see Working with Companies (WCMP) for background. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Required. Error: `Invalid Company:` the company specified is not valid; however, the record is not listed on the Promotion Upload Error Records Report.
Record Type	alphanumeric, 3 positions	The table where the record should be created or deleted. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Required. PRM = Promotions: Create a new promotion, or delete an existing promotion and all related records. See Promotion Creation (PRM). PRB = Promotion BOGO: Used only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY. See Promotion BOGO Creation (PRB). PBP = Promotion BOGO by Price Code: Used only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE. See Promotion BOGO by Price Code Creation (PBP). PMD = Promotion Discount: Tiered promotion details. See Promotion Discount Creation (PMD). PRS = Promotion Source: A source code eligible for a promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS). PIC = Promotion Item Category: Item categories eligible for an item category promotion. See Promotion Item Category Creation (PIC). PRC = Promotion Customer: Customers or customer price groups eligible for a promotion. See Promotion Customer Creation (PRC). PIE = Promotion Item Exclusion: Items or item categories excluded from a promotion. See Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE). See General Rules for Promotion Uploads. Error: `Record type not found`: the record type does not match one of the values listed above, or is blank. The record type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
Request Type	alphanumeric, 1 position	Indicates whether to add a record, or delete a promotion and all related records. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Required. Valid values: A = add a promotion or a related record type D = delete a promotion and all its related records. This setting is valid only for a record type of PRM (Promotion). To delete any other record type, you can use the screens in Working with Promotions (WPRO) or use the upload to delete the promotion and all its related records. Errors: `Record Already Exists`: the Request Type is D, and the Record Type is PIE or PRB `Invalid Request Type`: Request Type is D, and the Record Type is PRS, PIC, PRC, PMD, or the Request Type is not A or D. The request type is case-sensitive.
Sequence #	numeric, 9 positions (CYYMMDD format)	A unique number to identify a record in the Promotion Upload table. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Optional; however, required to upload multiple related records for the same promotion and record type at the same time (for example, multiple Promotion Source records for the same promotion).
Record Date	numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format)	The date when the record was added. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Required. Error: `Invalid Date`: no record date is specified.
Processed Flag	alphanumeric, 1 position	The upload sets this flag to E when the record is in error.
Promotion Code	alphanumeric, 7 positions	If the Record Type is PRM, this is the promotion to create or delete; otherwise, this is the promotion associated with the related record, such as a Promotion Source. Used for record type: All. Conditions: Required. Errors: `Duplicate Promotion Code:` the Record Type is PRM and the promotion already exists. `Missing Promotion Code`: the Promotion Code field is blank for any Record Type. `Invalid Promotion Code`: the Promotion Code field is invalid for any Record Type. Note: The upload does not prevent you from entering the promotion code in lower case; however, you would not be able to enter the promotion code in order entry, and instead would need to select it from a list. If the promotion code is blank for a delete request (the Request Type is D), the upload record is flagged as an error, but the Error Desc remains blank.
Description	alphanumeric, 30 positions	The description of the promotion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Required. Error: `Missing Description`: the Record Type is PRM and there is no description.
Start Date	numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format)	The first date when the promotion is effective. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Required. Error: `Invalid Start Date`: the Record Type is PRM and there is no start date specified, or the date specified is not valid.
End Date	numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format)	The last date when the promotion is effective. Must be on or later than the Start Date. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Required. Error: `Invalid End Date`: the Record Type is PRM and: there is no end date specified, or the end date is earlier than the start date, or the end date is not a valid date
Popup 1-4	alphanumeric, 30 positions each	The text to display in a pop-up window in order entry. See Pop up window messages 1-4 for background. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional.
Priority	numeric, 3 positions	The priority in which the system evaluates whether this promotion applies to an order. See Priority for background. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Required. Error: `Invalid Priority`: the Record Type is PRM and the priority is 0.
Promotion Type	alphanumeric, 1 position	The type of discount to apply to orders that qualify for this promotion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Required if you define any order promotion values. Possible settings are: A = Additional freight B = BOGO C = Item Category F = Freight O = Order T = Tiered discount blank = a message-only promotion See About Messaging Promotions or About Discount Promotions for background. Error: `Invalid Promotion Type`: the Record Type is PRM and the promotion type specified is not one of the values listed above. The promotion type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
Promotion ID	alphanumeric, 7 position	A code used to identify or group promotion codes for reporting and analysis. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional.
Qualify Amount	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	Optionally, specify the total merchandise amount required for the order to qualify for the promotion. See the Qualifying $ amount (Qualifying dollar amount) for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Valid only for an order, freight, additional freight, or item category promotion (Promotion Type is A, C, F, or O). Optional. Errors: `Invalid Qualifier for Tier Promotion:` there is a qualifying amount and the Promotion Type is T `Qualifier Not Valid For Promo Type`: there is a qualifying amount and the Promotion Type is B
Free Freight	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set to Y if freight is free of charge with this promotion; otherwise set this field to N. See Free freight for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is F (freight) and there is not a Freight override, PRM Dollar Discount, or PRM Percent Discount specified; a freight promotion must specify only one type of discount. Errors: `Discount conflict`: both Free freight and Freight override are specified, or no freight discount is specified `Only Valid for Freight Promotion`: this is not a freight promotion `Qualifier Not Valid for Free Freight`: The Free freight field was not set to Y, N, or blank for a freight promotion. The field is case-sensitive, so lowercase values are invalid. Note: This field is optional when you create a promotion; however, if it is blank instead of set to N, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen and then click OK at the Change Promotion screen.
Freight Override	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The override amount to charge for freight with this promotion. See Freight override amount for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is F (freight). Cannot be selected if Free freight, PRM Dollar Discount, or PRM Percent Discount is also selected; a freight promotion must specify only one type of discount. Errors: `Discount conflict`: both Free freight and Freight override are specified, or no freight discount is specified `Qualifier Not Valid for Promo Type`: this is not a freight promotion
PRM Dollar Discount	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The dollar discount to apply for an order, item category, freight, or additional freight promotion. See Discount amount for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when Promotion Type is A, C, or O (additional freight, item category, or order). Cannot be specified in combination with another discount. Optional. Errors: `Discount required`: no discount amount or percent is specified for an additional freight, item category, or order promotion `Discount conflict`: more than one discount amount or percent is specified for an additional freight, item category, or order promotion Note: If a dollar discount is specified for a freight promotion, the Additional Charge field should specify a valid additional charge code.
PRM Percent Discount	numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal	Specify the percentage discount to apply for an order, item category, freight, or additional freight promotion. See Discount percent for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, C, F, or O (additional freight, item category, freight, or order). Cannot be specified in combination with another discount. Optional. Errors: `Discount required`: if no discount amount, percent, or freight override is specified `Discount conflict`: if more than one discount amount, percent, special price (item category promotion) or freight override is specified Note: If a percentage discount is specified for a freight promotion, the Additional Charge field should specify a valid additional charge code.
From SCF	alphanumeric, 3 positions	The first (lowest) SCF eligible for a ship via override). Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, C, F, or O (additional freight, item category, freight, or order). Valid entry only if there is a Ship Via Override specified; in this case, the From SCF and To SCF are required. Errors: `Qualifier Not Valid for Promotion Type`: this is a BOGO, tiered, or item category promotion (the Promotion Type is B, T, or C), or the SCF range is not valid, and the country does not match the Default Country for Customer Address (B17) `Invalid From SCF:` The SCF is not valid for the country (either the Override Country, if specified, otherwise, for the Default Country for Customer Address (B17)) The SCF range is not valid, and the country matches the Default Country for Customer Address (B17)
To SCF	alphanumeric, 3 positions	The last (highest) SCF eligible for a ship via override). See To SCF for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, C, F, or O (additional freight, item category, freight, or order). Valid entry only if there is a Ship Via Override specified; in this case, the From SCF and To SCF are required. Errors: `Qualifier Not Valid for Promotion Type`: this is a BOGO, tiered, or item category promotion (the Promotion Type is B, T, or C), or the SCF range is not valid, and the country does not match the Default Country for Customer Address (B17). `Invalid From SCF:` The SCF is not valid for the country (either the Override Country, if specified, otherwise, for the Default Country for Customer Address (B17)). The SCF range is not valid, and the country matches the Default Country for Customer Address (B17).
Discount Receipt	alphanumeric, 1 position	Not currently implemented. Error: `Fields Not In Use`: this field is populated.
Customer Pct Discount	alphanumeric, 1 position	Not currently implemented. Error: `Fields Not In Use`: this field is populated.
Qualify Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The total unit quantity required for an order to qualify for the promotion. See Qualifying quantity for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is NOT B or T (tiered or BOGO). Optional. Error: `Qualifier Not Valid for Promotion Type`: this is a BOGO or tiered promotion (the Promotion Type is B or T).
US Only	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this field to Y to restrict a freight or additional freight promotion discount, or ship via override, to states in the continental U.S.A; otherwise set it to N. See Continental USA only for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A or F (additional freight or freight). Valid entry only if there is a Ship Via Override specified. Optional. Errors: `Invalid Continental USA Only Flag`: this field is not set to Y or N. This field is case-sensitive, so a lowercase entry causes an error. `Qualifier Not Valid for Promotion Type`: this is not an additional freight or freight promotion (Promotion Type of A or F). Note: This field is optional when you create a promotion; however, if it is blank instead of set to N, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen and then click OK at the Change Promotion screen.
Additional Charge	alphanumeric, 2 positions	The additional charge to use when adding a non-prorated discount to an order. See Additional charge code for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order). Optional. Not case-sensitive. Errors: `Qualifier Not Valid for Promo Type`: The Promotion Type is not A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order). `Invalid Add'l Chg Code`: The additional charge code specified does not exist. `Additional Charge Code Required`: There is no additional charge code specified for a freight promotion.
Offer Number	alphanumeric, 3 positions	The offer that must be associated with the source code on the order header for the order to qualify for the promotion. You cannot specify both an offer and a source code as a promotion qualifier. See Qualifying offer for a discussion. Not case-sensitive. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional. Errors: `Invalid Offer`: The offer specified is not valid. `Either Source code or offer`: Both an offer and Source Code are specified.
Pay Type	numeric, 2 positions	The pay type that must be used on the order for the order to qualify for the promotion. See Qualifying pay type for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional. Error: `Invalid Pay Type`: The pay type specified is not valid.
Ship Via Override	numeric, 2 positions	The ship via to replace the current ship via on an order as part of the promotion. See Ship Via Override for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order). Optional, but required if the record specifies an Override Country. Errors: `Invalid Ship Via Override`: The ship via specified is not valid. `Override Option Not Valid for Promo Type`: The promotion type is not A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order).
Override Country	alphanumeric, 3 positions	The country eligible to receive the ship via override. See Ship via override and Ship via country for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order). Optional, but required if the record specifies a Ship Via Override. Errors: `Invalid Ship Via Override Country`: The country specified is not valid. `Ship Via Override Required`: The upload record specifies an override country but no Ship via override. Note: This field is not case-sensitive; however, if the override country is lower case, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen, correct the Ship via country, and then click OK at the Change Promotion screen.
Source Code	alphanumeric, 9 positions	The source code that must be on the order header for an order to qualify for the promotion. You cannot specify both a source code and an offer as qualifiers. See Qualifying source for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional. Errors: `Invalid Source Code`: The source code specified is not valid. `Either Source code or offer`: Both an Offer Number and source code are specified. Note: This field is not case-sensitive; however, if the source code is lower case, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen, click OK to advance to the Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen, and use that screen to delete and re-add the source code.
Required Entry	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this field to Y to require entry of this promotion in order entry, and to require that it must be included in the order message for the order API; otherwise, set this field to N if the promotion should apply automatically to qualifying orders. See Required entry for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional. Note: This field is optional when you create a promotion; however, if it is blank instead of set to N, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen and then click OK at the Change Promotion screen.
First Buyer	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this field to: O = to restrict the promotion to customers who have not previously placed any orders S = to restrict the promotion to customers who have not previously had an order shipped to them See First time buyer for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional. Error: `Invalid First Time Buyer:` The field is set to any character other than O or S. This field is case-sensitive, so a lowercase entry causes an error.
Qualify Code	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this field to: O = to include all order lines in the qualifiers for the promotion I = to include only items in a specified item category as qualifiers for the promotion See Qualifying $ amount type for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is C (item category). Optional. Errors: `Qualify Code required`: No Qualify Code is specified, but there is a Qualify Amount specified for the item category promotion. `Qualifier Not Valid for Promo Type`: Possible reasons: This is not an item category promotion. The field is not set to O or I. The record type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
Ship Via Priority	numeric, 1 position	The priority that must be assigned to the ship via on the order header for the order to qualify for the promotion. See Qualifying via priority for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional.
Special Price	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The price to apply to qualified items for an item category promotion. See Item category special price for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Used only when the Promotion Type is C (item category). Optional, but you need to specify either a PRM Dollar Discount, PRM Percent Discount, or Special Price for an item category promotion. Error: `Special Price Not Valid`: A special price is specified even though the promotion type is not C. `Discount Conflict`: There is more than one discount (PRM Dollar Discount, PRM Percent Discount, or Special Price) specified for an item category promotion.
Max Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The maximum number of units an order can include to qualify for the promotion. See Max qty for a discussion. Used for record type: PRM. Conditions: Optional.
		The fields that are labeled PRB update the Promotion BOGO table. This table is used only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY. See the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for background.
PRB Item Cgy	alphanumeric, 4 positions	An item category that qualifies for the BOGO promotion. See the Item category field at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for a discussion. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional, but you need to specify either a PRB Item Cgy or PRB Item for an item category promotion. Errors: `Invalid Item Category`: The specified item category is invalid. `Item Cat or Item as Qualifier`: Both PRB Item Cgy and the PRB Item are specified. `Item Category Not Valid for Auto Add`: You cannot set the PRB Free field to A if you use item category as a qualifier. `Missing Item or Item Cat`: Neither the PRB Item Cgy or the PRB Item is specified.
PRB Item	alphanumeric, 12 positions	An item that qualifies for the BOGO promotion. See the Item field at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for a discussion. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional, but you need to specify either a PRB Item or PRB Item Cgy. Errors: `Invalid Item`: The item specified is not valid. `Item Cat or Item as Qualifier`: Both PRB Item Cgy and the PRB Item are specified. `Missing Item`: A PRB SKU is specified but not an item. `Missing Item or Item Cat`: Neither the PRB Item Cgy or the PRB Item is specified. Note: If you set the PRB Free field to A to automatically add an item, you should either use the PRB Item field to specify a non-SKU’d item, or use both the PRB Item and PRB SKU fields to specify the particular SKU of a SKU’d item.
PRB SKU	alphanumeric, 14 positions	A SKU that qualifies for the BOGO promotion. See theItem field at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for a discussion. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional. Errors`:` `Invalid SKU`: The SKU is invalid, or specified for a non-SKU’d item `Missing Item`: A SKU is specified, but not a PRB Item
PRB Required Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The quantity of the item category, item, or SKU required for the BOGO promotion. Updates the Req qty (required quantity) field for the BOGO Promotion. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Required. Error: `Missing Required Qty`: No required quantity is specified.
PRB BOGO Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The quantity of the item to receive the discount, to be set to no charge, or to be added at no charge. Updates the BOGO qty field for the BOGO Promotion. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Required. Error: `Missing BOGO Qty`: No BOGO quantity is specified.
PRB Discount Pct	numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal	Specify the percentage discount to apply to the BOGO order line. Updates the Disc % at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item). If you do not set the PRB Free field to Y (free) or A (Free Auto Add), you can specify either a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional.
PRB Discount Amt	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	Specify the discount amount to apply to the BOGO order line. Updates the Disc $ at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item). If you do not set the PRB Free field to Y (free) or A (Free Auto Add), you can specify either a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional.
PRB Spc Price	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	Specify the special price to apply to the BOGO order line. Updates the Price at the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item). If you do not set the PRB Free field to Y (free) or A (Free Auto Add), you can specify either a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional.
PRB Multiple Allowed	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this field to Y to allow the BOGO discount to apply multiple times to an order, or set it to N to allow the discount to apply just once per order. See the Allow mult (allow multiples) field for background. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Optional (but if you leave this field blank, the system treats it as a setting of N when evaluating the BOGO promotion for an order). Case-sensitive. Error: `Invalid Multiple Allowed`: The setting was not N, Y, or blank.
PRB Free	alphanumeric, 1 position	Use this field to indicate whether the BOGO order line is discounted, changed to no charge, or added automatically at no charge. Valid values: N = The item already on the order is discounted. You need to specify either a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price. Y = The item already on the order is changed to no charge. With this setting, you should not specify a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price. A = The promotion adds the PRB Item (and PRB SKU, if the item has SKU’s) to the order at no charge. With this setting, you should not specify a PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, or PRB Spc Price, and you should use the PRB Item and PRB SKU fields to specify a valid non-SKU’d item or a particular SKU of a SKU’d item. Used for record type: PRB. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to CATEGORY. Required. Error: `Required for Record Type`: This field is not set to N, Y, or A for a PRB record.
		The fields that are labeled PBP update the Promotion BOGO by Price Code table. This table is used only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE. See the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen for more information.
PBP Price Code	numeric, 3 positions	The price code required to qualify for the promotion. Updates the Price code at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. The promotion can use either a price code or an item as a qualifier. Required if there is no PBP Item specified. Errors: `Price Code or Item as Qualifier`: Both the PBP Price Code and the PBP Item are specified, or neither is specified. `Invalid Price Code`: The PBP Price code specified is invalid.
PBP Item	alphanumeric, 12 positions	The item required to qualify for the promotion. Updates the Item at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. The promotion can use either a price code or an item as a qualifier. Required if there is no PBP Price Code specified. Not case-sensitive. Errors: `Price Code or Item as Qualifier`: Both the PBP Price Code and the PBP Item are specified, or neither is specified `Invalid Item`: The PBP Item specified is invalid. `Missing Item`: There is a PBP Sku specified but no PBP Item.
PBP Sku	alphanumeric, 14 positions	The SKU required to qualify for the promotion. Updates the SKU at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Item is a SKU’d item. Optional, even if the PBP Item has SKU’s. Error: `Invalid SKU`: The PBP Item is not a SKU’d item, but a SKU is specified. The PBP Sku specified is not valid for the PBP Item.
PBP Required Amount	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The dollar value total required for the PBP Required Qty to qualify for the promotion. Updates the Req Amt at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. Required if there is no PBP Required Qty; otherwise, optional (you can specify both a required quantity and a required amount). Error: `Missing Bogo Qualifier`: No PBP Required Qty or PBP Required Amount is specified.
PBP Required Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The total quantity required of the PBP Price Code or PBP Item to qualify for the promotion. Updates the Req Amt at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. If there is also a PBP Required Amount, then the number of units specified here must meet or exceed the PBP Required Amount; however, if the PBP Required Qty is 99999, that means that a quantity of 1 or more meets the requirement for the promotion. Required if there is no PBP Required Amount; otherwise, optional (you can specify both a required quantity and a required amount). Error: `Missing Bogo Qualifier`: No PBP Required Qty or PBP Required Amount is specified.
PBP BOGO Prc	numeric, 3 positions	The price code eligible for the promotion discount or special price. Updates the BOGO price code at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. With this setting, the PBP Free flag should be set to N, no PBP Auto Add item or PBP Add SKU should be specified, and the PBP BOGO Qty and a discount (either the PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or PBP Special Price) are required. Optional. Errors: `Invalid BOGO Price Code`: The PBP BOGO Prc specified is not valid. `Price Code or Item As Qualifier:` A PBP BOGO Prc is specified and the PBP Free flag is set to A.
PBP BOGO Qty	numeric, 5 positions	The quantity of the item to receive the discount percentage, discount amount, or special price. Updates the BOGO qty at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. With this setting, the PBP Free flag should be set to N, no PBP Auto Add item or PBP Add SKU should be specified, and the PBP BOGO Prc (price code) and a discount (either the PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or PBP Special Price) are required. Required if the PBP Free setting is not Y or A. Errors: `Price Code or Item as Benefit`: A PBP BOGO Qty is specified and the PBP Free flag is set to A. `Auto Add Not Selected`: No PBP BOGO Qty is specified, and the PBP Free flag is not set to A.
PBP Discount Pct	numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal	The percentage discount to apply to the PBP BOGO Qty. Updates the Disc % at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Free setting is N; in this case, either the PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price is required. Errors: `Missing Bogo Discount`: None of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) are specified. `BOGO Discount Conflict`: More than one of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) is specified.
PBP Discount Amount	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The discount amount to the PBP BOGO Qty. Updates the Disc $ at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Free setting is N; in this case, either the PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price is required. Errors: `Missing Bogo Discount`: None of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) is specified. `BOGO Discount Conflict`: More than one of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) is specified.
PBP Special Price	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The special price to apply to the PBP BOGO Qty. Updates the Price at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Free setting is N; in this case, either the PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price is required. Errors: `Missing Bogo Discount`: None of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) are specified. `BOGO Discount Conflict`: More than one of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price ) is specified.
PBP Prorate Disc	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this flag to N to apply the total discount amount to the discounted or free item, or set it to Y to prorate the discount across the required quantity and the BOGO quantity. Updates the Prorate flag at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. Case-sensitive. Required. Error: `Prorate Discount Invalid`: The PBP Prorate Disc flag is not set to Y or N.
PBP Multiple Allowed	alphanumeric, 1 position	Set this flag to N if the promotion can apply just once to an order, or set it to Y if the promotion can apply multiple times when there is a sufficient quantity of the specified item or price code. Updates the Allow mult flag at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. Case-sensitive. Required. Error: `Invalid Allow Multiples Value`: The PBP Multiple Allowed flag is not set to Y or N.
PBP Free	alphanumeric, 1 position	Indicates the type of benefit for the promotion: A = Free Auto Add: Add the PBP Auto Add item to the order automatically. N = No: There is no auto-add item. Apply a discount or a special price to the BOGO quantity. Y = Free: There is no auto-add item. Set the BOGO quantity to no charge. Updates the Free field at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO) and the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE. Case-sensitive. Required. Errors: `Price Code or Item as Benefit`: The PBP Free field is set to A (auto-add), but there is also a PBP BOGO Qty specified; or there is no PBP Auto Add item specified; or the PBP Add SKU is not a valid SKU for the PBP Auto Add. `Price Code or Item As Qualifier:` The PBP Free field is set to A (auto-add), but there is also a PBP BOGO Prc specified. `Required Field For This Type`: The PBP Free field is not set to A, N, or Y. `Missing Bogo Discount`: The PBP Free field is set to N, but a PBP Auto Add item is specified.
PBP Auto Add	alphanumeric, 12 positions	Indicates the item to add to the order. Updates the Auto add item field at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Free flag is set to A. Required if the PBP Free flag is set to A. Case-sensitive only for non-SKU’d items. Errors: `Missing Bogo Qualifier`: An auto-add item is specified as well as a PBP Discount Pct or PBP Discount Amount. `Price Code or Item As Qualifier`: An auto-add item is specified as well as a PBP BOGO Prc. `Invalid Auto Add Item`: The item specified is invalid. `Missing Auto Add SKU`: The item specified has SKU’s, but no PBP Add SKU is specified. `Auto Add Not Selected`: An item is specified, but the PBP Free flag is set to Y rather than A. Price Code or Item as Benefit: The PBP Add SKU specified is not a valid SKU for this item.
PBP Add SKU	alphanumeric, 14 positions	The SKU of the PBP Auto Add item to add to the order. Updates the SKU for the Auto add item at the Work with BOGO Discounts by Item/Price Code Screen. Used for record type: PBP. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is B (BOGO), the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62)is set to PRICE CODE, and the PBP Free flag is set to A. Required if the PBP Free flag is set to A and the PBP Auto Add item has SKU’s. Not case-sensitive. Errors: `Invalid Auto Add SKU`: A PBP Add SKU is specified, but the PBP Auto Add item does not have SKU’s. Missing Auto Add SKU: No PBP Add SKU is specified, and the PBP Auto Add item has SKU’s.
		The fields that are labeled PMD update the Promotion Discount table. This table is used only if for tiered promotions. See the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for background.
PMD Discount Pct	numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal	The percentage to discount the order when it meets the requirement for this tier but not the next. See the Percent discount field on the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PMD. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is T (tiered). You can specify either the PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) for each record. Optional. Errors: `Tier Discount Conflict`: The record includes a PMD Discount Amt or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) in addition to the PMD Discount Pct. `Missing Tier Discount`: The record did not include a PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s).
PMD Discount Amt	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The amount to discount the order when it meets the requirement for this tier but not the next. See the Dollar discount field on the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PMD. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is T (tiered). You can specify either the PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) for each record. Optional. Errors: `Tier Discount Conflict`: The record includes a PMD Discount Amt or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) in addition to the PMD Discount Pct. `Missing Tier Discount`: The record did not include a PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s).
PMD Dollars	numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal	The merchandise total required for the order to qualify for the tier. See the Merch amount field on the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PMD. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is T (tiered). Required. Errors: `Missing PMD Dollars`: No PMD Dollars amount is specified. `Record Already Exists` : There is already a Promotion Discount record for the specified promotion and merchandise total.
PMD Item	alphanumeric, 12 positions	The item to add to the order when it meets the requirement for this tier but not the next. See the Free item field on the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PMD. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is T (tiered). You can specify either the PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) for each record. Optional. The PMD SKU is required if this is a SKU’d item. Errors: `Tier Discount Conflict`: The record includes a PMD Discount Pct, or PMD Discount Amt in addition to the PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s). `Missing Tier Discount`: The record did not include a PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s). `Invalid Discount Item`: The item specified is invalid.
PMD SKU	alphanumeric, 14 positions	The SKU of the PMD item to add to the order. See the Free item field on the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PMD. Conditions: Used only when the promotion type is T (tiered), and there is a PMD Item specified. You can specify either the PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s) for each record. Optional. Errors: `Tier Discount Conflict`: The record includes a PMD Discount Pct, or PMD Discount Amt in addition to the PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s). `Missing Tier Discount`: The record did not include a PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s).Invalid Discount SKU: `Invalid Discount SKU`: The SKU specified is invalid; the PMD Item does not have SKU’s; or there is no PMD Item specified.
		The following field updates the Promotion Source table. You can create one or more Promotion Source records for any promotion type. The Source Code field, used in the PRM record type, also creates a record in the Promotion Source table.
PRS Source	alphanumeric, 9 positions	A source code that qualifies an order for the promotion if the source is on the order header. If you specify a source code in this field, it creates a record in the Promotion Source table. See Qualifying source for a discussion. Used for record type: PRS. Conditions: Required. Errors: `Invalid Source Code`: The source code specified is not valid. `Missing Source`: No source code is specified. `Record Already Exists`: There is already a Promotion Source record for the specified promotion and source code. Note: This field is not case-sensitive; however, if the source code is lower case, you will not be able to apply the promotion to an order. The error message displayed in order entry is `Qualifying criteria not met for this promotion`. To update the field and prevent the error from occurring after you initially create the promotion, you can select Change for the promotion at the Work with Promotions Screen, click OK to advance to the Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen, and use that screen to delete and re-add the source code.
		The following fields that are labeled PRC update the Promotion Customer table. You can create one or more Promotion Customer records for any promotion type. See the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen for background.
PRC Cust Num	numeric, 9 positions	A customer who is eligible for the promotion. See the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PRC. Conditions: Either the PRC Cust Num or the PRC Cust Group is required. Errors: `Invalid Customer Number`: The customer number specified is invalid. `Missing Customer/CPG`: Neither a customer number or a customer price group is specified. `Customer/CPG Conflict`: Both a customer number and a customer price group are specified.
PRC Cust Group	alphanumeric, 4 positions	A customer price group that is eligible for the promotion. See the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PRC. Conditions: Either the PRC Cust Num or the PRC Cust Group is required. Errors: `Invalid Customer Price Group`: The customer price group specified is invalid. `Missing Customer/CPG`: Neither a customer number or a customer price group is specified. `Customer/CPG Conflict`: Both a customer number and a customer price group are specified.
		The following field updates the Promotion Item Category table. You can create one or more Promotion Item Category records for an item category promotion. See the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen for background.
PIC Item Cgy	alphanumeric, 4 positions	An item category that is eligible for the promotion. See the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PIC. Conditions: Required. Errors: `Invalid Item Category`: The item category code is not valid. `Missing Item Category`: No item category code is specified.
		The following fields that are labeled PIE update the Promotion Item Exclusion table. You can create one or more Promotion Item Exclusion records for any promotion type. See the Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen for background.
PIE Item	alphanumeric, 12 positions	An item that is ineligible for the promotion. See the Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PIE. Conditions: Either the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy is required. Errors: `Invalid Item`: The item specified is invalid. `Missing Item\Item Category`: Neither the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy is specified. `Item\Item Category Conflict`: Both the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy are specified.
PIE Item Cgy	alphanumeric, 4 positions	An item category that is ineligible for the promotion. See the Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen for a discussion. Used for record type: PIC. Conditions: Either the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy is required. Errors: `Invalid Item Category`: The item category specified is not valid. `Missing Item\Item Category`: Neither the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy is specified. `Item\Item Category Conflict`: Both the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy are specified.
The upload updates the following field if the upload record is in error.
Error Desc	alphanumeric, 45 positions	The description of the error. See Promotion Upload Errors for a list.

Fields Used in the Promotion Upload by Record Type

In this topic:

Promotion Creation (PRM)

Use a Record Type of PRM to create or update a record in the Promotion table. See the Create Promotion Screen for background on the fields in this table.

The required and optional fields vary based on the Promotion Type.

For details, see:

Order Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Company
Record Type: PRM
Request Type: A or D
Record Date
Promotion Code
Description
Start Date
End Date
Priority
Promotion Type: O
PRM Dollar Discount OR PRM Percent Discount

Optional fields:

Sample PRM Order promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|1|1150414||PUORDER|PUORDER PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|1|O|PROMOID|5.95||.00|||||1||OA|WEB|4|4|US||N|O||1|.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|5.00|.00

Additional uploads for an order promotion: You can also upload one or more Promotion Source, Promotion Customer, and Promotion Item Exclusion records for an order promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS), Promotion Customer Creation (PRC), and Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE) for more information.

Freight Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Company
Record Type: PRM
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
Description
Start Date
End Date
Priority
Promotion Type: F
Free Freight OR Freight Override OR PRM Dollar Discount OR PRM Percent Discount (with Additional Charge required for PRM Dollar Discount OR PRM Percent Discount)

Optional fields:

Sample PRM Freight promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|2|1150414||PUFRT|PUFRT PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|2|F|PROMOID|6.95|Y|.00|||||1|Y||WEB|4|4|US||N|O||1|.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Additional uploads for a freight promotion: You can also upload one or more Promotion Source or Promotion Customer records for a freight promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS) and Promotion Customer Creation (PRC) for more information.

Additional Freight Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Company
Record Type: PRM
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
Description
Start Date
End Date
Priority
Promotion Type: A
PRM Dollar Discount OR PRM Percent Discount

Optional fields:

Sample PRM Additional Freight promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|3|1150414||PUADLFR|PUADLFR PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|3|A|PROMOID|5.00||.00|||||1|Y|A|WEB|4|4|US||N|O||1|.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Additional uploads for an additional freight promotion: You can also upload one or more Promotion Source or Promotion Customer records for an additional freight promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS) and Promotion Customer Creation (PRC) for more information.

Item Category Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Company
Record Type: PRM
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
Description
Start Date
End Date
Priority
Promotion Type: C
PRM Dollar Discount OR PRM Percent Discount OR Special Price

Optional fields:

Sample PRM Item Category promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|4|1150414||PUITMCT|PUITMCT PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|4|C|PROMOID|5.95||.00|||||1|||WEB|4|0|||N|O|O|1|10.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Additional uploads for an item category promotion: An item category promotion also requires one or more Promotion Item Category records; see Promotion Item Category Creation (PIC) for more information.

You can also upload one or more Promotion Source or Promotion Customer records for an item category promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS) and Promotion Customer Creation (PRC) for more information.

Tiered Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Optional fields:

Sample PRM Tiered promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|5|1150414||PUTIERD|PUTIERD PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|5|T|PROMOID|0||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||1|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Additional uploads for a tiered promotion: A tiered promotion also requires one or more Promotion Discount records; see Promotion Discount Creation (PMD) for more information.

You can also upload one or more Promotion Source, Promotion Customer, and Promotion Item Exclusion records for a tiered promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS) Promotion Customer Creation (PRC), and Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE) for more information.

BOGO Promotion Fields

Required fields:

Optional fields:

Sample PRM BOGO promotion upload record:

7|PRM|A|6|1150414||PUBOGO|PUBOGO PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|6|B|PROMOID|0.00||.00|||||0|||WEB|4|0|||N|O||1|.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Additional uploads for a BOGO promotion: Depending on the setting of the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value, a BOGO promotion also requires:

one or more Promotion BOGO records if the system control value is set to CATEGORY; see Promotion BOGO Creation (PRB) for more information.
one or more Promotion BOGO by Price Code records if the system control value is set to PRICE CODE; see Promotion BOGO by Price Code Creation (PBP) for more information.

You can also upload one or more Promotion Source, Promotion Customer, and Promotion Item Exclusion records for a tiered promotion. See Promotion Source Creation (PRS), Promotion Customer Creation (PRC), and Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE) for more information.

Promotion Deletion

To delete a promotion and all its related records:

Required fields:

Any records for the promotion in the following tables are deleted:

Promotion BOGO
Promotion BOGO by Price Code
Promotion Customer
Promotion Discount
Promotion Item Category
Promotion Item Exclusion
Promotion Source

Sample PRM Delete promotion upload record:

7|PRM|D|7|1150414||PUDELTE|PUDELTE PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|1150401|1150601|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 1|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 2|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 3|POPUP WINDOW MESSAGE 4|7||PROMOID|5.00||.00|||||1|Y|N|WEB|4|4|US|SOURCE7|N|O|O|1|.00|10||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion BOGO Creation (PRB)

You can create one or more Promotion BOGO records for a BOGO promotion. The system uses this table only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to CATEGORY; otherwise, the system uses the Promotion BOGO by Price Code table when evaluating and applying BOGO promotions.

See the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) for background on BOGO promotions that use these records.

Note:

Setting the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value to PRICE CODE does not prevent you from creating records in the Promotion BOGO table; however you cannot advance to the Work with BOGO Discount Screen (Item Category or Item) with this setting, and the system does not use the Promotion BOGO records to evaluate or apply BOGO promotions.

All fields required except where indicated:

Company
Record Type: PRB
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
PRB Item Cgy OR PRB Item (PRB SKU is optional)
PRB Required Qty
PRB BOGO Qty
PRB Discount Pct OR PRB Discount Amt OR PRB Spc Price
PRB Free
PRB Multiple Allowed is optional

Sample PRB BOGO promotion upload record:

7|PRB|A|8|1150414||BOGO1|PUBOGOB PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||SKU|RED|1|1|5.00|.00|.00|Y|N|0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion BOGO by Price Code Creation (PBP)

You can create one Promotion BOGO by Price Code record for a BOGO promotion. The system uses this table only if the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value is set to PRICE CODE; otherwise, the system uses the Promotion BOGO table when evaluating and applying BOGO promotions.

See the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen for background on BOGO promotions by price code.

Note:

Setting the BOGO Grouping by Price Code or Category (L62) system control value to CATEGORY does not prevent you from creating records in the Promotion BOGO by Price Code table; however you cannot advance to the BOGO Discount by Item/Price Code Screen with this setting, and the system does not use the Promotion BOGO by Price Code records to evaluate or apply BOGO promotions.

All fields required except where indicated:

Company
Record Type: PBP
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
PBP Price Code OR PBP Item and PBP Sku (optional)
PBP Required Amount or PBP Required Qty, or both
if PBP Free is set to N or Y:
PBP BOGO Prc and PBP BOGO Qty
PBP Discount Pct OR PBP Discount Amount OR PBP Special Price
if PBP Free is set to A:
PBP Auto Add and PBP Add SKU (required if the PBP Auto Add item has SKU’s)
PBP Prorate Disc
PBP Multiple Allowed
PBP Free

Sample PBP BOGO by Price Code promotion upload record:

7|PBP|A|9|1150414||BOGO1|PUBOGOP PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||101|||50.00|1|101|1|5.00|.00|.00|N|Y|N|||.00|.00||||0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Discount Creation (PMD)

You can create one or more Promotion Discount records for a tiered promotion. At least one record is required. See the Work with Promotion Discounts Screen for more information.

Required fields:

Company
Record Type: PMD
Request Type: A
Record Date
Promotion Code
PMD Discount Pct OR PMD Discount Amt OR PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the PMD Item has SKU’s)
PMD Dollars

Sample PMD Discount promotion upload record:

7|PMD|A|10|1150414||TG|TG TIER PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||0.00|.00|SKU|PINK||0||||||25.00|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Source Creation (PRS)

You can create Promotion Source records for any promotion type. See the Work with Qualifying Source Codes Screen for more information.

Note:

The Source Code field, used in the PRM record type, also creates a record in the Promotion Source table.

Required fields:

Sample PRS Source promotion upload record:

7|PRS|A|11|1150414||OP|OPSORCS PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||0.00|.00|||SOURCE7|0||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Customer Creation (PRC)

You can create Promotion Customer records for any promotion type. See the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen for more information.

Required fields:

Sample PRC Customer promotion upload record:

7|PRC|A|12|1150414||OP|OPCUSTC PROMOTION DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||0.00|.00||||55||||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Item Category Creation (PIC)

You can create Promotion Item Category records for item category promotions. See the Work with Qualifying Item Categories Screen for more information.

Required fields:

Sample PIC Item Category promotion upload record:

7|PIC|A|13|1150414||ITMCATP|PUITMC PROMO DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||0.00|.00||||0||DFLT||||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Item Exclusion Creation (PIE)

You can create Promotion Item Exclusion records for any promotion type except for freight and additional freight. See the Work with Item/Category Exclusions Screen for background.

Required fields:

Sample PIE Item Exclusion promotion upload record:

7|PIE|A|14|1150414||ITMCATP|PUITMX PROMO DESCRIPTION|0|0|||||0|||0.00||.00|||||0||||0|0||||||0|.00|0||||0|0|.00|.00|.00|||0|||.00|0|0|0|.00|.00|.00||||||0.00|.00||||0||0||DFLT||0|.00|.00|.00

Promotion Upload Errors

The errors possible through the promotion upload are listed below. See the Promotion Upload Table (PRMUPLD) and Fields Used in the Promotion Upload by Record Type for background.

Error	Record Types	Description
`Additional Charge Code Required`	PRM	There is no Additional Charge specified for a freight promotion.
`Auto Add Not Selected`	PBP	No PBP BOGO Qty is specified, and the PBP Free flag is not set to A.
`BOGO Discount Conflict`	PBP, PRB	PBP: More than one of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or PBP Special Price) is specified. PRB: More than one of the required discounts (PRB Discount Pct, PRB Discount Amt, PRB Spc Price, or PRB Free) is specified.
`Customer/CPG Conflict`	PRC	Both a PRC Cust Num and a PRC Cust Group are specified.
`Discount conflict`	PRM	Both Free Freight and Freight Override are specified, or no freight discount is specified, and the Promotion Type is F More than one PRM Dollar Discount or PRM Percent Discount is specified for an additional freight order promotion There is more than one discount (PRM Dollar Discount, PRM Percent Discount, or Special Price) specified for an item category promotion
`Discount required`	PRM	No PRM Dollar Discount or PRM Percent Discount is specified for an additional freight, item category, or order promotion.
`Duplicate Promotion Code`	PRM	`T`he Promotion Code specified already exists.
`Either Source code or offer`	PRM, PRS	PRM: Both the Offer Number and Source Code were specified. PRS: the promotion already specifies a qualifying offer.
`Fields Not In Use`	PRM	A Discount Receipt or Customer Pct Discount is specified.
`Invalid Add'l Chg Code`	PRM	The Additional Charge code specified does not exist.
`Invalid Allow Multiples Value`	PBP	The PBP Multiple Allowed flag is not set to Y or N.
`Invalid Auto Add SKU`	PBP	A PBP Add SKU is specified, but the PBP Auto Add item does not have SKU’s.
`Invalid BOGO Price Code`	PBP	The PBP BOGO Prc specified is not valid.
`Invalid Company`	any	The Company specified is not valid. Note: When the company, is invalid, the record is not listed on the Promotion Upload Error Records Report.
`Invalid Continental USA Only Flag`	PRM	The US Only flag is not set to Y or N for a freight or additional freight promotion (the Promotion Type is A or F). This field is case-sensitive, so a lowercase entry causes an error.
`Invalid Customer Number`	PRC	The PRC Cust Num specified is invalid.
`Invalid Date`	any	No Record Date is specified.
`Invalid Discount Item`	PMD	The PMD Item specified is invalid.
`Invalid End Date`	PRM	There is no end date specified; or the End Date is earlier than the Start Date; or the date specified is not valid.
`Invalid First Time Buyer`	PRM	The First Buyer setting is not O or S. This field is case-sensitive, so a lowercase entry causes an error.
`Invalid From SCF`	PRM	The From SCF or To SCF is not valid for the country (either the Override Country, if specified, otherwise, for the Default Country for Customer Address (B17)) The SCF range is not valid, and the country matches the Default Country for Customer Address (B17)
`Invalid Item`	PBP. PIE, or PRB	The PBP Item, PIE Item, or PRB Item specified is invalid.
`Invalid Item Category`	PIC or PRB	The PIC Item Cgy or PRB Item Cgy is not valid.
`Invalid Multiple Allowed`	PRB	The PRB Multiple Allowed setting was not N, Y, or blank.
`Invalid Offer`	PRM	The Offer Number specified is not valid.
`Invalid Pay Type`	PRM	The Pay Type specified is not valid.
	PBP	The PBP Price Code specified is invalid.
`Invalid Priority`	PRM	The Priority is 0.
`Invalid Promotion Code`	any except PRM	The Promotion Code specified is invalid.
`Invalid Promotion Type`	PRM	The promotion type specified is not one of the values listed under Promotion Type. The promotion type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
`Invalid Qualifier for Tier Promotion`	PRM	`T`here is a Qualify Amount specified and the Promotion Type is T.
`Invalid Request Type`	any	The Request Type is D and the Record Type is PRS, PIC, PRC, PMD; or the Request Type specified is not A or D. The request type is case-sensitive.
`Invalid Ship Via Override`	PRM	The Ship Via Override specified is not valid.
`Invalid Ship Via Override Country`	PRM	The Override Country specified is not valid.
`Invalid SKU`	PBP or PRB	PBP: The PBP Item is not a SKU’d item, but a PBP Sku is specified; or the PBP Sku specified is not valid for the PBP Item. PRB: The PRB SKU is invalid, or specified for a non-SKU’d PRB Item.
`Invalid Source Code`	PRM or PRS	PRM: The Source Code specified is not valid. PRS: The PRS Source specified is not valid.
`Invalid Start Date`	PRM	There is no Start Date specified, or the date specified is not valid.
`Item Cat or Item as Qualifier`	PRB	Both PRB Item Cgy and the PRB Item are specified.
`Item Category Not Valid for Auto Add`	PRB	The PRB Free field is set to A, and PRB Item Cgy is specified as a qualifier.
`Item\Item Category Conflict`	PIE	Both the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy are specified.
`Missing Auto Add SKU`	PBP	No PBP Add SKU is specified, and the PBP Auto Add item has SKU’s.
`Missing Bogo Discount`	PBP	None of the required discounts (PBP Discount Pct, PBP Discount Amount, or the PBP Special Price) is specified; or, the PBP Free field is set to N, but a PBP Auto Add item is specified.
`Missing BOGO Qty`	PRB	No PRB BOGO Qty is specified.
`Missing Bogo Qualifier`	PBP	No PBP Required Qty or PBP Required Amount is specified.
`Missing Customer/CPG`	PRC	Neither a PRC Cust Num or a PRC Cust Group is specified.
`Missing Description`	PRM	There is no Description specified.
`Missing Item`	PBP or PRB	PBP: There is a PBP Sku specified but no PBP Item. PRB: A PRB SKU is specified, but not a PRB Item.
`Missing Item Category`	PIC	No PIC Item Cgy is specified.
`Missing Item\Item Category`	PIE	Neither the PIE Item or the PIE Item Cgy is specified.
`Missing Item or Item Cat`	PRB	Neither the PRB Item Cgy or the PRB Item are specified.
`Missing PMD Dollars`	PMD	No PMD Dollars amount is specified.
`Missing Promotion Code`	any	The Promotion Code is blank. Note: If the promotion code is blank for a delete request (the Request Type is D), the upload record is flagged as an error, but the Error Desc remains blank.
`Missing Required Qty`	PRB	No PRB Required Qty is specified.
`Missing Source`	PRS	No PRS Source is specified.
`Missing Tier Discount`	PMD	The record did not include one of the following: PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s).
`Only Valid for Freight Promotion`	PRM	Free Freight is specified, but the Promotion Type is not F.
`Override Option Not Valid for Promo Type`:	PRM	A Ship Via Override is specified, and the promotion type is not A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order).
`Price Code or Item as Benefit`	PBP	The PBP Free field is set to A (auto-add), but there is also a PBP BOGO Qty specified; or there is no PBP Auto Add item specified; or the PBP Add SKU is not a valid SKU for the PBP Auto Add item.
	PBP	Both the PBP Price Code and the PBP Item are specified; or neither is specified; or a PBP BOGO Prc is specified and the PBP Free flag is set to A.
`Prorate Discount Invalid`	PBP	The PBP Prorate Disc flag is not set to Y or N.
`Promotion Type Conflict`	any except PRM	The Promotion Code specified for a PIC Record Type is not an item category promotion. The Promotion Code specified for a PMD Record Type is not a tiered promotion. The Promotion Code specified for a PRB or PBP Record Type is not a BOGO promotion.
`Promotion/Record Type Mismatc`	PIE	The Promotion Code specified for a PIE Record Type is a freight or additional freight promotion.
`Qualifier Not Valid for Free Freight`	PRM	The Free Freight field was not set to Y, N, or blank for a freight promotion. The field is case-sensitive, so lowercase values are invalid.
`Qualifier Not Valid For Promo Type`	PRM	There is a Qualify Amount specified and the Promotion Type is B. Either Free Freight and Freight Override is specified, and the Promotion Type is not F. A Freight Override is specified and the Promotion Type is not F. An Additional Charge code is specified and the Promotion Type is not A, F, or O (additional freight, freight, or order). A Qualify Code is specified but this is not an item category promotion. A Qualify Code is not set to O or I. The record type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
`Qualifier Not Valid for Promotion Type`	PRM	A From SCF or To SCF is specified for a BOGO, tiered, or item category promotion (the Promotion Type is B, T, or C). the SCF range in the From SCF to To SCF is not valid, and the country does not match the Default Country for Customer Address (B17) The US Only flag is populated for promotion that is not an additional freight or freight promotion (Promotion Type of A or F). A Qualify Qty is specified for a BOGO or tiered promotion (the Promotion Type is B or T)
`Qualify Code required`	PRM	No Qualify Code is specified, but there is a Qualifying $ amount type specified for an item category promotion.
`Record Already Exists`	PIE, PRB, PRS, PMD	The Request Type is D, and the Record Type is PIE or PRB. The Record Type is PRS, and the Promotion Source record already exists. The Record Type is PMD, and the Promotion Discount record already exists. In this situation, a duplicate is identified by the PMD Dollars.
`Record type not found`	N/A	The record type does not match one of the values listed under Record Type. The record type is case-sensitive, so lowercase entries are invalid.
`Required Field For This Type`	PBP	The PBP Free field is not set to A, N, or Y.
`Required for Record Type`	PRB	This PRB Free field is not set to N, Y, or A.
`Ship Via Override Required`	PRM	The upload record specifies an Override Country but no Ship via override.
`Special Price Not Valid`	PRM	A Special Price is specified even though the promotion type is not C.
`Tier Discount Conflict`	PMD	The record includes more than one of the following: PMD Discount Pct, PMD Discount Amt, or PMD Item (and PMD SKU if the item has SKU’s).

Setting Up Pricing Information

Topics in this part: The following topics describe how to set up and change pricing information:

Understanding Promotional Pricing provides an overview of promotional pricing and the basic information you need to set up pricing information on the system.
Work with Promotional Pricing Groups (WPRG) describes how to create and change a promotional pricing group.
Work with Promotional Pricing (WPRP) describes how to create and change a promotional pricing record. This record establishes the eligibility requirements and the incentives available in promotional pricing.
Working with Price Codes (WPCD) describes how to create price codes that you can assign to various items, so that you can offer your customers special price breaks when they order a sufficient combined quantity of these items.
Assigning Price Codes (APCD) describes how to assign price codes to items based on source code or offer.
Price Code Upload describes how to upload price code information from an external system to create, update, or delete records in the Price Code, Price Code Customer, and Price Code Details tables.
Display Price Code Assignments (DPCA) allows you to review the items/SKUs assigned to a price code by offer or source code and the requirements that must be met for an order to be eligible for the price code.
Working with Price Tables (WPTB) describes how price table pricing works and how to create and maintain price tables from items and groups of items.
Package Insert Processing (WPIP) describes how to create package insert/promotional items that will be automatically added to an order in Order Entry/Maintenance.
Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR) describes how to set up coupons for percentage or dollar discounts on an order, or for selected item(s), and provides an overview of how coupon discounts work.
Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG) describes how to create and work with customer price groups used during quantity price matrix pricing, customer price group pricing, and as a qualifier for a discount promotion.
Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload describes how to upload customer price group SKU exclusion information from an external system to create or update records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table.
Customer Price Group Pricing provides an overview of the customer price group pricing method, required setup, and processing details.
Working with Quantity Price Matrix (WQPM) describes how to create and work with the quantity price matrix pricing method.
Pricing Upload Interface describes how to upload source discount and quantity price matrix pricing from an external system.

Understanding Promotional Pricing

Purpose: This topic discusses promotional pricing and what you need to do to set up both features.

Promotional pricing allows you to specify an item, a group of items, or a dollar amount that a customer must order to receive an incentive item at no charge or at a special price. Promotional pricing is defined for a source code or offer. When the customer meets the eligibility requirements established in the promotional pricing record, a pop-up window appears in Order Entry allowing the customer to select from an incentive group or select an incentive item. The system automatically adds the item to the order.

You can also create promotions based on the day of the week, which you can review in Order Entry by selecting Dsp Daily Promo at the Select Customer Sold To for Order screen. However, you cannot offer these “daily specials” if you use tax-inclusive pricing, as there is no way to determine if the order is subject to VAT and tax-inclusive pricing before you enter the header information on an order. See the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value.

Promotional pricing windows display only if the order type indicates to display promo windows. Typically, you would not want them to display for fax or mail orders.

Promotional Pricing

Initial steps: Use the following steps to set up promotional pricing (see Understanding Promotional Pricing).

Create the offer or source codes for which promotional pricing will be valid (as described in Introducing Offer and Source Codes). The Promo pricing field for the source code must be selected. In addition, to receive promotional pricing for the specified offer/source code, make sure you create item/SKU offer prices for the items/SKUs assigned to the offer (associated with the source code).
Use Establishing Order Types (WOTY) to indicate the order types subject to promotional pricing. (For example, you might not want promotional pricing pop-up windows to appear for mail or fax orders.) The Promo windows field in the order type record must be set to Promo (promotional pricing).

Promotional group setup: If you are using promotional groups, or if you want to offer a group of items as an incentive, you need to set up promotional groups before you can create a promotional pricing record.

Select Work with Promotional Pricing Groups (WPRG) to create a promotional group, and assign the items the customer must order to receive the incentive.
If you want the customer to select an incentive item from a group of items, you also use this function to set up your incentive groups.

Promotion pricing setup: Select Work with Promotional Pricing (WPRP) to define the requirements that will make the customer eligible for the incentive group or incentive item, what the incentive group or item will be, the maximum quantity, and whether it is offered at no charge, a special incentive price, or a discounted price.

Promotional pricing in Order Entry: You advance to a promotional pricing pop-up window or screen only when:

The customer places an order from a source code or offer for which a promotion has been defined and
The customer orders:
a specific quantity from a predefined group
a specific quantity of an item
a certain dollar amount of merchandise, and
The Promo pricing (Promotional pricing) field in the source code record is selected, and
The Promo windows field in the order type record is set to Promo (promotional pricing)

Note:

Once you have added an incentive item to an order, the system will not reprice it or reassess tax, regardless of changes to the shipping address, customer tax status, etc.

Regular Price Code Pricing

If the Price Codes (D93) system control value is selected, the system applies price code discounts to an order during repricing and end-of-order pricing.

See When Repricing Occurs for more information on when repricing occurs during interactive order entry.

Source code setting: To apply price code discounting to an order, the Price method field for the source code on the order header must be set to Reg Plus Reprice.

Note:

If the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value contains a customer price group code, the system performs Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing instead of Regular Price Code Pricing.

The system performs the following steps during regular price code pricing.

Determine Whether the Order Qualifies for a Price Code

To qualify for a price code:

#	Step
1.	The date on the Order Header must fall within the Start date and End date defined for the price code in the Price Code table. You can review the start and end dates for price codes on the Work with Price Codes Screen.
2.	The sold to customer on the order must be defined for the price code in the Price Code Customer table. You can review the customers and customer price groups that qualify for a price code on the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen. Note: If you do not define any sold to customers or customer price groups for a price code, then ALL sold to customers and customer price groups qualify for the price code.
3.	The items on the order must be assigned to the price code and meet the price code requirements. Which items are assigned to the price code? The system looks at the Price Code Details table to determine which items on the order are assigned to the price code. When assigning an item to a price code, you assign the item to the price code by offer or source code. The system uses the source code on the order header to determine whether the item on the order qualifies for the price code. If the item contains SKUs and a SKU is not defined in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code. If the item contains SKUs and a SKU is defined in the Price Code Details table, only the specified SKUs qualify for the price code.
	Price code requirements: The system looks at the Price Code table to determine if the items on the order that are assigned to the price code meet the price code requirements. Quantity required: The total quantity the customer must order of all qualifying items to get the price break. Note: The system evaluates price code quantity by ship-to address. Allow multiples? Unselected = Once an order qualifies for the price code based on the price code quantity requirement, the system applies the price code discount to all qualifying items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code. Selected = Once an order qualifies for the price code based on the price code quantity requirement, the remaining items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify for the price code. The Distinct By setting defines how the system determines whether the order meets the price code multiple requirement: Distinct By: Blank = The order must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three items/SKUs defined for the price code in order to qualify. If the order contains 7 items that qualify, the system applies the price code to 6 of the items. Item = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate items in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate items defined for the price code in order to qualify. SKU = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate SKUs in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate SKUs defined for the price code in order to qualify. Category = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate item categories in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate item categories for the items defined for the price code in order to qualify. See Regular Price Code Pricing Examples for examples of how price codes are applied to an order based on the price code requirements.

Apply the Price Code to the Order

You can apply only one price code to an order line.

Price code hierarchy: If an order line qualifies for more than one price code and you are using Regular Price Code Pricing, the system uses the Sequence number assigned to each price code to determine the order in which to apply price codes to an order.

Use the price code with the lowest sequence number.
If more than one price code has the same sequence number, use the price code with the lowest numeric price code.

Once you apply a price code to an order line, it no longer qualifies for another price code.

After you apply the first price code to the order, the system reevaluates the order to determine if it qualifies for another price code. The system continues to apply price codes to the order, using the price code hierarchy, until all of the eligible lines on the order are assigned to a price code.

Applying a price code to a portion of an order line: To easily determine the price code discount applied to the lines on an order, enter each order line for a quantity of 1. If an order line contains a quantity greater than 1 and only part of the quantity on the order line qualifies for the discount, the system applies the discount to the quantity that qualifies for the discount and leaves the remaining quantity on the order line at its initial price. The extended price of the order line represents the discounted quantity price + the non-discounted quantity price.

Partial price code line example: An order line qualifies for a price code discount: $3.00 off 2. The Multiples field is selected for the price code, indicating the order must meet the price code requirement again to apply the price code to the order multiple times. The order line quantity is 3 with a unit price of 10.00. The system applies the price code discount to 2 units of the item (10.00 - 3.00 = 7.00). The third unit remains priced at 10.00. The extended price for the order line is 24.00 (7.00 + 7.00 + 10.00) and the unit price for the order line is 8.00 (24.00 / 3).

Note:

There may be a rounding discrepancy if the extended price of an order line does not divide evenly by the order quantity. This discrepancy should be no more than a few pennies. Example: Change the discount in the example above from $3.00 off 2 to $2.00 off 2. The order line quantity is 3 with a unit price of 10.00. The system applies the price code discount to 2 units of the item (10.00 - 2.00 = 8.00). The third unit remains priced at 10.00. The extended price for the order line is 26.01 and the unit price is 8.67 (26.00 / 3 = 8.666, which rounds to 8.67; 8.67 + 8.67 + 8.67 = 26.01).

Price method: The system updates the Price method for any order line whose price was updated during price code pricing to E Price Code.

Note:

Price code repricing does not apply to manually priced order lines associated with a price override reason code.
When calculating the price code discount, the system uses the price defined in the ODT Price field for the order line.

Apply Discounts and Promotions to the Order

After applying a price code to the lines on the order, the system applies any additional discounts to the order, such as a discount percentage defined for the source code or Order Header, free gifts based on offer or source code, additional charge dollar discounts based on the offer or source code, or package inserts.

For more information: See Regular Price Code Pricing Examples for examples of how the system applies each type of price code discount to an order.

Regular Price Code Pricing Examples

Example: Price Code Special Price Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#
303	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 303 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
303	C1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	none	Price remains $10.00
2	B1	$20.00	none	Price remains $20.00
3	C1	$30.00	303	Special price: $20.00 each for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Because the calculated order line price for item C1 is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 3:Offer = 30.00 Actual = 20.00 Discount = 10.00 :33.33%

Example: Price Code Dollar Off Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#
101	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 101 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
101	A1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	101	Dollar off: $2.00 off 1 Price changes from $10.00 to $8.00
2	B1	$20.00	none	Price remains $20.00
3	C1	$30.00	none	Price remains $30.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Because the calculated order line price for item A1 is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 1:Offer = 10.00 Actual = 8.00 Discount = 2.00 :20.00%

Example: Price Code Percent Off Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
202	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 202 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
202	B1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	none	Price remains $10.00
2	B1	$20.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $20.00 to 18.00
3	C1	$30.00	none	Price remains $30.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Because the calculated order line price for item A1 is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 2:Offer = 20.00 Actual = 18.00 Discount = 2.00 :10.00%

Example: Price Code Group Price Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Quantity	Price
1	SKA	RED	1	$40.00
2	SKB	BLUE	1	$20.00
3	SKC	GRN	1	$30.00
4	SKD	GREY	1	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The items on the order that qualify for price code 404 in the Price Code Details table are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7

Note:

If an item contains SKUs and no SKUs are defined for the item in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code.

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
2	SKB	BLUE	$20.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $20.00 to $13.33
3	SKC	GRN	$30.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
1	SKA	RED	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $26.67
4	SKD	GREY	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Results:

merchandise total for lines assigned to price code 404 = $90.00
$90.00 merchandise total - $60.00 group price = $30.00 discount amount to prorate

Note:

Order line 4 does not qualify for the price code 404 discount because you must order the qualifying items in groups of 3. If the customer ordered 2 more qualifying items, the order would qualify for the price code 404 discount two times because it would have two qualifying groups of 3 on the order.

Prorating the Group Price

The system applies the group price discount to each qualifying order line on a pro-rata basis.

Order line 2 calculations:

20.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .2222 discount percentage

20.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .2222 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 13.33 unit selling price

Order line 3:

30.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .3333 discount percentage

30.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .3333 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 20.00 unit selling price

Order line 1:

40.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .4444 discount percentage

40.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .4444 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 26.67 unit selling price

Discount message: Because the calculated order line price for lines 1-3 is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 3:Offer = 30.00 Actual = 20.00 Discount = 10.00 :33.33%

Example: Applying Multiple Price Codes to the Order

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	3	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price codes in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
101	10
202	10
303	10
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	A1	7
202	B1	7
303	C1	7
404	D1	7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	101	Dollar off: $2 off 1 Price changes from $10.00 to $8.00
2	B1	$20.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $20.00 to 18.00
3	C1	$30.00	303	Special price: $20.00 each for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
4	D1	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $20.00

Example: Item Qualifies for More than One Price Code

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Quantity	Price
1	POLO	RED	1	$40.00
2	POLO	BLUE	1	$40.00
3	POLO	GRN	1	$40.00
4	POLO	GREY	1	$40.00
5	POLO	BLCK	1	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price codes in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
101	10
202	10
303	10
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	POLO	7
202	POLO	7
303	POLO	7
404	POLO	7

Note:

If an item contains SKUs and no SKUs are defined for the item in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code.

Important:

You can apply only one price code to an order line. If an order line qualifies for more than one price code and you are using Regular Price Code Pricing, the system uses the Sequence number assigned to each price code to determine the order in which to apply price codes to an order.

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	POLO	RED	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $20.00
2	POLO	BLUE	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $20.00
3	POLO	GRN	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $20.00
4	POLO	GREY	$40.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $40.00 to 36.00
5	POLO	BLCK	$40.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $40.00 to 36.00

Note:

Of the price codes that were eligible to apply to the order, price code 404 was assigned the lowest sequence number. The next lowest sequence number was assigned to price code 303; however, the quantity required for price code 303 was 3 and only two units of the qualifying items remained on the order that were not assigned a price code. Because of this, the system assigned the next price code with the lowest sequence number (price code 202) to the two remaining items on the order.

Example: Price Code Multiples and Distinct By

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 and source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Item Category	Quantity	Price
1	SKA	SML	A	1	$10.00
2	SKA	SML	A	1	$10.00
3	SKB	SML	B	1	$10.00
4	SKC	SML	C	1	$10.00
5	SKD	SML	D	1	$10.00
6	SKD	MED	D	1	$10.00
7	SKD	LRG	D	1	$10.00

Determine eligible price codes: The order and customer qualify for price code 202 in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Price Code Discount
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
202	SA	7
202	SB	7
202	SC	7
202	SD	7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices the lines on the order in ascending price, order line number sequence.

Multiples Unselected

Because Multiples for price code 202 is unselected, once the order qualifies for the price code based on the price code quantity requirement, the system applies price code 202 to all qualifying items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 2:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Now that the order qualifies for price code 202, the system applies price code 202 to all qualifying items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code:
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Blank

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is blank, the order must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 2:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 3 and 4:
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 5 and 6:
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order line 7 does not qualify since it does not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2.
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Item

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is Item, the price code requires separate items in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 3:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 4:
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order lines 5, 6 and 7 do not qualify for price code 202 since they do not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by item.
5	SD	SML	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By SKU

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is SKU, the price code requires separate SKUs in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 2:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 3 and 4:
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 5 and 6:
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order line 7 does not qualify since it does not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by SKU.
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Item Category

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is Item Category, the price code requires separate item categories in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line	Item	SKU	Category	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
						The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 3:
1	SA	SML	A	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	B	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
						The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 4:
2	SA	SML	A	$10.00	none	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	C	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
						Order lines 5, 6 and 7 do not qualify for price code 202 since they do not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by item category.
5	SD	SML	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
6	SD	MED	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
7	SD	LRG	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Work with Price Codes Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create and work with price codes used to define price breaks you offer for orders of a group of items.

How to display this screen: Enter WPCD in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Price Codes from a menu.

Field	Description
Price code	This code defines a repricing method you offer to your customers when they order a sufficient quantity of items associated with this price code. Enter a price code and select OK to display price codes in numeric order, beginning with your entry. Numeric, 7 positions; Optional
Description	A description of the price code. Enter a full or partial description and select OK to display price codes that contain your entry. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; Required.
Seq (Sequence number)	This number controls the order in which the system evaluates pricing for an item; if two or more price codes would apply, the system uses the price code with the lowest sequence number. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Discount	The type of discount: Price Code Special Price Discount: Displays as Sp: followed by the Special price. For orders subject to VAT, displays as Tax incl price: followed by the Tax inclusive price for special price. The discount is a special price for the qualifying items associated with the price code. Price Code Dollar Off Discount: Displays as $: followed by the Dollar discount. The discount is a dollar amount to subtract from the regular item price for the qualifying items associated with the price code. Price Code Percent Off Discount: Displays as %: followed by the Percent discount. The discount is a percentage to subtract from the regular item price for the qualifying items associated with the price code. Price Code Group Price Discount: Displays as Grp: followed by the Group price. For orders subject to VAT, displays as Grp tax incl: followed by the Tax inclusive price for group price. The discount is a group price for the qualifying items associated with the price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Start Date	The beginning date when the price code discount becomes effective. The system compares this date to the date on the Order Header to determine whether the order qualifies for the price code discount. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
End Date	The end date when the pice code discount becomes effective. The system compares this date to the date on the Order Header to determine whether the order qualifies for the price code discount. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a price code	Select Create to advance to the Create Price Code Screen.
Change a price code	Select Change for a price code to advance to the Change Price Code screen. You can change any information on this screen except the Price code field. For field descriptions, see Create Price Code Screen.
Delete a price code	Select Delete for a price code to delete it. When you delete a price code, the system deletes any associated records in the Price Code Customer table.
Display a price code	Select Display for a price code to advance to the Display Price Code screen. You cannot change any fields on this screen. For field descriptions, see Create Price Code Screen.
Define the customer price group or sold to customer number eligible for the price code discount	Select Customer for a price code to advance to the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen.
Create, update, and delete records in the Price Code, Price Code Customer, and Price Code Details tables from an external system	Select Upload. See Price Code Upload for processing details.

Create Price Code Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a price code.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Price Codes Screen.

Field	Description
Price code	This code defines a repricing method to apply in Order Entry when the customer orders a sufficient quantity of qualifying items. Numeric, 7 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	A description of the price code. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Start date	The beginning date when the price code discount becomes effective. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
End date	The end date when the pice code discount becomes effective. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Qty required	The total quantity the customer must order of all qualifying items to get the price break. Note: The system evaluates minimum price code quantity by ship-to address. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Distinct By	The method the system uses to determine whether the customer ordered the quantity required to receive the group price. Valid values: Item = The quantity required is by item. SKU = The quantity required is by SKU. Category = The quantity required is by item category. Optional.
Allow Multiples	Defines whether the order qualifies for a discount multiple times if the correct number of qualifying items/SKUs is added to the order. Selected = Allow multiples. Unselected = Do not allow multiples. This field must be selected if you define a Distinct By setting or Group price.
One of the following repricing methods is required: Special price Dollar discount Percent discount Group price	NA
Special price	The special price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if dollar discount percent discount, or group price not entered.
Tax inclusive price for special price	The special price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code on orders subject to VAT. Displayed only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Note: If an order is subject to VAT, but the item is subject to a price code with a only a special price and not a Tax-inclusive price, the system uses the special price for the price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Dollar discount	The dollar amount to subtract from the regular price of each qualifying item associated with the price code. If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the system applies the discount against the regular tax-inclusive price to calculate the tax-inclusive price code price. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if special price, percent discount, or group price not entered.
Percent discount	The percentage of the regular item price to subtract for each qualifying item associated with the price code. If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the system applies the discount against the regular tax-inclusive price to calculate the tax-inclusive price code price. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if special price, dollar discount, or group price not entered.
Group price	The group price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if special price, dollar discount, or percent discount not entered.
Tax inclusive price for group price	The group price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code on orders subject to VAT. Displayed only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Note: If an order is subject to VAT, but the item is subject to a price code with a only a special price and not a Tax-inclusive price, the system uses the special price for the price code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Sequence	The order in which the system evaluates whether a price code applies to an order. Regular Price Code Pricing: If an order qualifies for two or more price codes, the system uses the price code with the lowest sequence number. If two price codes have the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest price code number. Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing: If an order qualifies for two or more price codes, the system uses the price code that provides the greatest discount to the order. If two price codes provide the same discount, the system uses the price code with the lowest sequence number. If two price codes have the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest price code number. Numeric, 7 positions; required. Note: The system will not prevent you from defining a repricing method that would change the item price into a credit (that is, a discount of more than 100% the item price).

Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define the customer price groups and sold to customers that qualify for the price code discount.

Important:

If you do not define any sold to customers or customer price groups for a price code, then ALL sold to customers and customer price groups qualify for the price code.

How to display this screen: Select Customer for a price code at the Work with Price Codes Screen.

Qualifying customers display on this screen in alphanumeric sold to customer number, price group code sequence.

Fields	Description
Price Code	The code and description of the price code. Code: Numeric, 7 positions; display-only. Description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Group	The code for the customer price group that qualifies for the price code discount. Customer price group codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Price Group table. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; Required if a customer is not defined.
Customer	The sold to customer number that qualifies for the price code discount. Sold to customer numbers are defined in and validated against the Customer Sold To table. Numeric, 9 positions; Required if a customer price group is not defined.
Name	The description of the customer price group code or the name of the sold to customer. If a company is not defined for the customer, the last name followed by the first name displays; for example: `LAST, FIRST`. If a company is defined for the customer, the company name followed by the last name and first name displays; for example: `MILL VILLAGE ATTN:NONNIE, NO`. The system truncates the name to 30 positions. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Define a qualifying customer price group	Enter a valid customer price group code and select OK. The qualifying customer price group displays in the bottom half of the screen.
Define a qualifying sold to customer	Enter a valid sold to customer number and select OK. The qualifying sold to customer number display in the bottom half of the screen.
Delete a qualifying customer price group or sold to customer	Select Delete for a qualifying customer price group or sold to customer to delete it.

Price Code Upload

Overview: The Price Code Upload allows you to upload price code information from an external system to create, update, or delete records in the Price Code, Price Code Customer, and Price Code Details tables.

In this topic:

For more information: See Working with Price Codes (WPCD) and Assigning Price Codes (APCD).

Price Code Upload Setup

The setup required to use the price code upload includes:

File for Upload

Create a Price Code text file for the price code information you wish to create, update, or delete. The file should be named PRICECDUPLOAD.txt.

Note:

The Request Type identifies the type of upload record.
You must create records in this file in the correct order; for example, you must process a Price Code upload record before you can upload a Price Code Customer upload record and Price Code Detail upload record for that price code. The system processes the records in ascending Seq # order.
Decimals in this file are explicit and not implied; for example, pass 19.99 and not 1999.
To leave any field in the upload file blank, pass a space in an alphanumeric field and a 0 in a numeric field so that the file can be processed without errors. Leaving a field with no space or 0 is interpreted as null in the database and causes errors.

See the Price Code Upload Process for more information on using the data in the text file.

Sample data: You can use the sample data below to create a price code upload file.

Sample PCO Price Code Upload record type:

7|1|PCO|U|1150416|1234567|PRICE CODE UPLOAD|1|1|5.00|0.00|0.00|0.00|0.00|0.00|ITEM|Y|1150401|1150501|||||0||||

Sample PCC Price Code Customer Upload record type:

7|2|PCC|U|1150416|1234567||0|0|.00|.00|.00|.00|.00|.00|||0|0|||||55||||

Sample PCD Price Code Detail Upload record type:

7|3|PCD|U|1150416|1234567||0|0|.00|.00|.00|.00|.00|.00|||0|0|SKU|RED||SOURCE7|0||||

Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload)

This table contains upload records for the Price Code, Price Code Customer, and Price Code Detail tables. The Request Type identifies the type of upload record.

Field	Description
Company	Required for all Record Types. A code for the company associated with the Price Code Upload record. The system processes only records associated with the company from where the Price Code Upload Process was submitted. Company codes are defined in and validated against the Company table. Price Code: Updates Company in the Price Code table. Price Code Customer: Updates Company in the Price Code Customer table. Price Code Detail: Updates Company in the Price Code Details table. Numeric, 3 positions.
Seq #	Required for all Record Types. A unique number assigned to each Price Code Upload record. The system processes the records in the Price Code Upload table in ascending sequence number order. Numeric, 9 positions.
Record Type	Required for all Record Types. The type of Price Code Upload record. Valid values: PCO = Price Code upload record; this record creates, updates, or deletes a record in the Price Code table. PCC = Price Code Customer upload record; this record creates or updates a record in the Price Code Customer table. PCD = Price Code Detail upload record; this record creates or updates a record in the Price Code Details table. Alphanumeric, 3 positions.
Request Type	Required for all Record Types. Indicates whether the Price Code Upload record creates, updates, or deletes a record. Valid values: U = Valid for all Record Types. Create or update a record. The system determines whether the Price Code Upload record creates or updates an existing record by comparing the information in the Price Code Upload record with the existing records in the Order Management System table. See Price Code Upload Process for more information on how the system determines if the Price Code Upload record creates a new record or updates an existing record. D = Valid only for Record Type PCO Price Code. Delete a Price Code record and its associated Price Code Customer records and Price Code Detail records. The system uses the information in the Price Code Upload record to determine which records to delete. Alphanumeric, 1 position.
Record Date	Required for all Record Types. The date the Price Code Upload record was created. Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format).
PCO Price Code	Required for all Record Types. A code to identify the price code to upload. Price codes are defined in and validated against the Price Code table. Price Code: Updates PCO Price Code in the Price Code table. Price Code Customer: Updates Price Code Code in the Price Code Customer table. Price Code Detail: Updates PCO Price Code in the Price Code Details table. Numeric, 7 positions.
Description	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. A description of the price code. Updates PCO Description in the Price Code table. Alphanumeric, 30 positions.
PCO Sequence	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The order in which the system evaluates whether a price code applies to an order. Regular Price Code Pricing: If an order qualifies for two or more price codes, the system uses the price code with the lowest sequence number. If two price codes have the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest price code number. Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing: If an order qualifies for two or more price codes, the system uses the price code that provides the greatest discount to the order. If two price codes provide the same discount, the system uses the price code with the lowest sequence number. If two price codes have the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest price code number. Updates PCO Sequence in the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions.
PCO Qty Required	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The total quantity the customer must order of all qualifying items to get the price break. Updates PCO Qty Required in the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions.
PCO Percent Discount	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Dollar Discount, PCO Special Price, or Group Price is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The percentage of the regular item price to subtract for each qualifying item associated with the price code. If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the system applies the discount against the regular tax-inclusive price to calculate the tax-inclusive price code price. Updates PCO Percent Discount in the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions with a 2-place decimal.
PCO Dollar Discount	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Special Price, or Group Price is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The dollar amount to subtract from the regular price of each qualifying item associated with the price code. If the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected, the system applies the discount against the regular tax-inclusive price to calculate the tax-inclusive price code price. Updates PCO Dollar Discount in the Price Code table. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
PCO Special Price	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, or Group Price is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The special price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code. Updates PCO Special Price in the Price Code table. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
PCO Tax Special Price	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, or Group Price is not defined and the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The special price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code on orders subject to VAT. Used only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Note: If an order is subject to VAT, but the item is subject to a price code with a only a special price and not a Tax-inclusive price, the system uses the special price for the price code. Updates PCO Tax Special Price in the Price Code table. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
Group Price	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, or PCO Special Price is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The group price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code. Updates PCO Group Price in the Price Code table. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
PCO Tax Group Price	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, or PCO Special Price is not defined and the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The group price to charge the customer for all qualifying items associated with the price code on orders subject to VAT. Used only if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Note: If an order is subject to VAT, but the item is subject to a price code with a only a group price and not a Tax-inclusive price, the system uses the group price for the price code. Updates PCO Tax Special Price in the Price Code table. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal.
Distinct By	Optional for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The method the system uses to determine whether the customer ordered the quantity required to receive the group price. Valid values: Blank = Distinct By setting not defined. ITEM = The quantity required is by item. SKU = The quantity required is by SKU. CATEGORY = The quantity required is by item category. Updates PCO Distinct By in the Price Code table. Alphanumeric, 10 positions.
Multiples	Required for Record Type PCO Price Code if a Distinct By setting or Group Price is defined. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. Defines whether the order qualifies for a discount multiple times if the correct number of qualifying items/SKUs is added to the order. Blank = Multiples setting not defined. Y = Allow multiples. Must be Y if the Distinct By field is populated. N = Do not allow multiples. Updates PCO Allow Multiples in the Price Code table. Alphanumeric, 1 position.
Start Date	Optional for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The beginning date when the price code discount becomes effective. Updates PCO Start Date in the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format).
End Date	Optional for Record Type PCO Price Code. Not used by Record Type PCC Price Code Customer or PCD Price Code Detail. The end date when the pice code discount becomes effective. The end date cannot be earlier than the start date or earlier than the current date. Updates PCO End Date in the Price Code table. Numeric, 7 positions (CYYMMDD format).
ITM Number	Required for Record Type PCD Price Code Detail. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCC Price Code Customer. A code for the item to assign to the price code. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. Updates ITM Number in the Price Code Details table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions.
SKU Code	Required for Record Type PCD Price Code Detail if the item contains SKUs and you want to specify which SKUs qualify for the price code; leave blank if all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCC Price Code Customer. A code for the SKU to assign to the price code. SKU codes are defined in and validated against the SKU table. Updates SKU Code in the Price Code Details table. Alphanumeric, 14 positions.
Offer Number	Required for Record Type PCD Price Code Detail if a SRC Source Code is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCC Price Code Customer. A catalog, advertisement, or other means you use to present merchandise to your customers. The price code defined for an item/offer combination applies to orders whose header-level source code points to the offer. Offers are defined in and validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR). Updates Offer Number in the Price Code Details table. Alphanumeric, 3 positions.
SRC Source Code	Required for Record Type PCD Price Code Detail if a Offer Number is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCC Price Code Customer. A code you use to group a segment of your customers. The price code defined for this item/source code combination applies to orders with this source code on the order header. Source codes are defined in and validated against the Source Code table. See Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Updates SRC Source Code in the Price Code Details table. Alphanumeric, 9 positions.
Customer	Required for Record Type PCC Price Code Customer if a Customer Price Group is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCD Price Code Detail. The sold to customer number that qualifies for the price code. Sold to customer numbers are defined in and validated against the Customer Sold To table. Updates Customer # in the Price Code Customer table. Numeric, 9 positions.
Customer Price Group	Required for Record Type PCC Price Code Customer if a Customer is not defined. Not used by Record Type PCO Price Code or PCD Price Code Detail. The code for the customer price group that qualifies for the price code discount. Customer price group codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Price Group table. Updates Customer Price Group in the Price Code Customer table. Alphanumeric, 4 positions.
Error Description	Updated by the system during the Price Code Upload Process. The reason why the Price Code Upload record has been placed in an error status. See Price Code Upload Errors. Alphanumeric, 20 positions.
Processed	Updated by the system during the Price Code Upload Process. The status of the Price Code Upload record. Valid values: Blank = The Price Code Upload record has not yet been processed. P = The Price Code Upload record has processed successfully. The system removes these records at the end of the Price Code Upload Process. E = The Price Code Upload record contains errors. See Price Code Upload Errors. Alphanumeric, 1 position.

PCUPLD Price Code Upload Periodic Function

Use the PCUPLD periodic function to update the Price Code table after you have completed the File for Upload.

Option	Setting
Function:	PCUPLD
Description:	PRICE CODE UPLOAD
Program name:	PFPRCCODUP
Company	The Company flag must be selected. The Price Code Upload process creates, updates, and deletes records in the Price Code, Price Code Customer, and Price Code Details tables based on the records in the Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload) using the company you entered when you submitted the PCUPLD periodic function.

The PCUPLD periodic function is delivered with the system; use the Working with Periodic Functions (WPER) menu option to review it.
Use the Working with Periodic Processes (WPPR) menu option to assign the UPPRCCD and PCUPLD periodic function to a periodic process.
Once you have created the periodic process, you can use the Execute Periodic Process screen (located in the Working with Periodic Processes (WPPR) or Executing Periodic Processes (EPRO)) to define a schedule for the job. See Defining the Job Schedule.

For more information: See delivered with the system; use the Scheduling Jobs for more information on How to Schedule a Job.

Price Code Upload Process

Use the following steps to upload Price Code records from an external system.

#	Step
1.	Create a text file named `PRICECDUPLOAD`.txt containing the price code data. See File for Upload for more information.
	Update Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload) with price code information from the text file: Use the File Storage API to create a record of the `PRICECDUPLOAD` file in the FILE_STORAGE table, and then run the UPPRCCD Upload Price Code File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter PRICECDUPLOAD) periodic function, or Place the file in the CWDIRECTCP_UPLOAD_ DIRECTORY if the file storage API is not enabled, and then run the UPPRCCD Upload Price Code File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter PRICECDUPLOAD) periodic function, or Use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the file.
2.	Submit the Price Code Upload process: Execute the PCUPLD Price Code Upload Periodic Function. The system submits the process for the specified company. Select Upload on the Work with Price Codes Screen. The system submits the process for the company you are currently in. The Record Type identifies the type of upload record: PCO = Price Code upload record. PCC = Price Code Customer upload record. PCD = Price Code Detail upload record.
3.	The system updates the Processed field for each record in the Price Code Upload table to blank to include all records in the upload process.
4.	The system processes the records in the Price Code Upload table in Seq # order.
5.	The system validates each record in the Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload).
	PCO Price Code Upload Record Validation The required fields for Record Type PCO Price Code are: Company: Validated against the Company table. Seq # Record Type: Must be PCO. PCO Price Code: Validated against the Price Code table. Request Type: U = Create or update. D = Delete. If the Request type is U and the price code does not exist in the Price Code table for the specified company, the system creates a new record in the Price Code table. If the Request type is U and the price code exists in the Price Code table for the specified company, the system overlays the existing record in the Price Code table with the values that are passed in the upload. If the Request type is D and the price code exists in the Price Code table for the specified company, the system deletes the existing record in the Price Code table and the associated records in the Price Code Customer and Price Code Details tables. If the Request type is D and the price code does not exist in the Price Code table for the specified company, the system places the upload record in an error status. Description PCO Sequence PCO Qty Required Enter only one of the following: PCO Percent Discount PCO Dollar Discount PCO Special Price; also PCO Tax Special Price if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Group Price; also PCO Tax Group Price if the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value is selected. Optionally, you can define: Start Date and End Date: The end date cannot be earlier than the start date. Distinct By: Valid values are ITEM, SKU, and CATEGORY. Multiples: Valid values are Y and N; must be Y if a Distinct By setting or Group Price is defined.
	PCC Price Code Customer Upload Record Validation The required fields for Record Type PCC Price Code Customer are: Company: Validated against the Company table. Seq # Record Type: Must be PCC. PCO Price Code: Validated against the Price Code table. Request Type: U = Create or update. If the Request type is U and the price code does not exist in the Price Code Customer table for the specified company and customer or customer price group, the system creates a new record in the Price Code Customer table. If the Request type is U and the price code exists in the Price Code Customer table for the specified company and customer or customer price group, the system overlays the existing record in the Price Code Customer table with the values that are passed in the upload. Enter one of the following: Customer: Validated against the Customer Sold To table. Customer Price Group: Validated against the Customer Price Group table.
	PCD Price Code Detail Upload Record Validation The required fields for Record Type PCD Price Code Detail are: Company: Validated against the Company table. Seq # Record Type: Must be PCD. PCO Price Code: Validated against the Price Code table. Request Type: U = Create or update. If the Request type is U and the price code does not exist in the Price Code Details table for the specified company and item/SKU/offer or item/SKU/source code combination, the system creates a new record in the Price Code Details table. If the Request type is U and the price code exists in the Price Code Details table for the specified company and item/SKU/offer or item/SKU/source code combination, the system overlays the existing record in the Price Code Details table with the values that are passed in the upload. ITM Number: Validated against the Item table. Enter one of the following: Offer Number: Validated against the Offer table. SRC Source Code: Validated against the Source Code table. Optionally, you can define: SKU Code: Validated against the SKU table. Must be a valid SKU for the specified ITM Number. If you define a SKU code, the price code applies only to the SKUs specified for the item in the Price Code Details table. If you do not define a SKU Code, the price code applies to all SKUs of the item.
6.	If the record in the Price Code Upload table does not pass validation, the system: Retains the record in the Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload) and updates the Processed field to E Error. Prints the record on the Price Code Upload Errors Report. A record in error remains in the Price Code Upload table until you fix or delete it. The system validates the record again the next time you submit the Price Code Upload Process.
7.	If the record in the Price Code Upload table passes validation, the system: Creates, updates, or deletes the appropriate record in the Order Management System database, based on the Record Type and Request Type. Deletes the record from the Price Code Upload Table (PriceCdUpload). Prints the record on the Price Code Upload Errors Report You can review or maintain: Price Code records on the Work with Price Codes Screen in the dWorking with Price Codes (WPCD) menu option. Price Code Customer records on the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen in the dWorking with Price Codes (WPCD) menu option. Price Code Detail records using the Assigning Price Codes (APCD) menu option.

Price Code Upload Errors

The system includes Price Code Upload records that are in error on the Price Code Upload Errors Report.

Error	Reason
General Errors The following errors can occur for any Record Type.
Invalid Company	The Company is missing, invalid, or inactive.
Invalid Seq#	The Seq # is missing.
Record Type not found	The Record Type is missing or invalid. Valid values: PCO = Price Code upload record; this record creates, updates, or deletes a record in the Price Code table. PCC = Price Code Customer upload record; this record creates or updates a record in the Price Code Customer table. PCD = Price Code Detail upload record; this record creates or updates a record in the Price Code Details table.
Invalid Request Type	The Request Type is missing or invalid. Valid values: U = Valid for all Record Types. Create or update a record. The system determines whether the Price Code Upload record creates or updates an existing record by comparing the information in the Price Code Upload record with the existing records in the Order Management System table. D = Valid only for Record Type PCO Price Code. Delete a Price Code record and its associated Price Code Customer records and Price Code Detail records. The system uses the information in the Price Code Upload record to determine which records to delete.
Invalid Record Date	The Record Date is missing or invalid. Must be in CYYMMDD format.
Invalid Price Code	The PCO Price Code is missing or invalid.
Price Code Table Errors The following errors can occur if the Record Type for the record in the Price Code Upload table is PCO Price Code.
Invalid Seq #	The PCO Sequence is missing or invalid.
Invalid Qty Req’d	The PCO Qty Required is missing or invalid.
Discount Missing	You must enter a PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, PCO Special Price, or Group Price.
Discount Conflict	You can define only one type of discount: PCO Percent Discount, PCO Dollar Discount, PCO Special Price, or Group Price.
Invalid Distinct by	The Distinct By field is invalid. Valid values: Blank = Distinct By setting not defined. ITEM = The quantity required is by item. SKU = The quantity required is by SKU. CATEGORY = The quantity required is by item category.
Invalid Multiples	The Multiples field is invalid or the Distinct By field is populated and the Multiples field is not set to Y. Valid values: Blank = Multiples setting not defined. Y = Allow multiples. N = Do not allow multiples.
Invalid Start Date	The Start Date is invalid.
Invalid End Date	The End Date is invalid. This error can occur if the End Date is earlier than the current date.
Invalid Field Populated	Fields not related to the PCO Record Type are populated.
Price Code Customer Table Errors The following errors can occur if the Record Type for the record in the Price Code Upload table is PCC Price Code Customer.
Invalid Customer	The Customer is invalid.
Cust\CPG Conflict	You must define a Customer or Customer Price Group for a PCC Price Code Customer upload record, but not both.
Invalid Cust Prc Grp	The Customer Price Group is invalid.
Invalid PCC Record	Fields not related to the PCC Record Type are populated.
Price Code Detail Table Errors The following errors can occur if the Record Type for the record in the Price Code Upload table is PCD Price Code Detail.
Invalid Item	The ITM Number is missing or invalid.
Invalid SKU	The SKU Code is invalid.
Invalid Offer	The Offer Number is invalid.
Offer\Src Conflict	You must define an Offer Number or SRC Source Code for a PCD Price Code Detail upload record, but not both.
Invalid Source	The SRC Source Code is invalid.
Invalid PCD Record	Fields not related to the PCD Record Type are populated.

Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload

Overview: The Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload allows you to upload customer price group SKU exclusion information from an external system to create or update records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table.

Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion allows you to define the items/SKUs that are not eligible for the customer price group discount applied to an order during Customer Price Group Pricing.

If an item contains SKUs, you can exclude all SKUs for the item or indicate the specific SKUs you wish to exclude from the customer price group discount.

In this topic:

For more information: See Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG).

Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload Setup

The setup required to use the customer price group SKU exclusion upload includes:

Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process

Use the following steps to upload Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion records from an external system.

#	Step
1.	Create a customer price group SKU exclusion text file that contains the records to upload. See the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table for details on file contents.
	Populate the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table using the contents of the text file: Use the File Storage API to upload the file to the FILE_STORAGE table, and then run the UPCSTPG Upload Customer Price Group Exclusion File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter CUSTPGEUP) periodic function, or Place the file in the CWDIRECTCP_UPLOAD_ DIRECTORY if the file storage API is not enabled, and then run the UPCSTPG Upload Customer Price Group Exclusion File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter CUSTPGEUP) periodic function, or Use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the records in the text file to the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table.
2.	Execute the CPGIXUP Customer Price Group Item Exclusion Upload Periodic Function to submit the Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload process. The system submits the process for the specified company.
3.	The system updates the Processed field for each record in the Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload table to blank to include all records in the upload process.
4.	The system processes the records in the Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload table in Seq # order.
5.	The system validates each record in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table. The required fields are: Company: Validated against the Company table. Seq # Customer Price Group: Validated against the Customer Price Group table. Item: Validated against the Item table. Optionally, you can define: SKU: Validated against the SKU table. Must be a valid SKU for the specified Item. If the item contains SKUs and you leave this field blank, all SKUs of the item are excluded from the customer price group discount. If the item contains SKUs and you specify a SKU in this field, only the SKU specified is excluded from the customer price group discount.
6.	If the record in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table does not pass validation, the system: Retains the record in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table and updates the Processed field to E Error. Prints the record on the CPG Item/SKU Exclusions Upload Error Records Report. A record in error remains in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table until you fix or delete it. The system validates the record again the next time you submit the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process.
7.	If the record in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table passes validation, the system: Creates or updates the appropriate record in the Order Administration database. Deletes the record from the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table. You can review and maintain customer price group SKU exclusions on the Work with Customer Price Group Exclusions Screen in the Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG) menu option.

Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table

Create records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table to create or update records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table.

To populate:

Create a customer price group SKU exclusion text file that contains the records to upload.
Upload the records from the file to the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table:
Use the File Storage API to upload the file to the FILE_STORAGE table, and then run the UPCSTPG Upload Customer Price Group Exclusion File (Program name PFR0134, Parameter CUSTPGEUP) periodic function, or
Use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the records in the text file to the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table.

You can use the sample data below to create records in the text file for upload.

7|1|CPG|RF123SKU4567|ROSE XSML WMNS||

Note:

To leave any field in the upload file blank, pass a space in the field so that the file can be processed without errors. Leaving a field with no space is interpreted as null in the database and causes errors.

For more information: See Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process for a discussion of the complete upload process.

Field	Description
Company	Required. A code for the company associated with the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload record. The system processes only records associated with the company from where the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process was submitted. Company codes are defined in and validated against the Company table. Updates Company in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table. Numeric, 3 positions.
Seq #	Required. A unique number assigned to each Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload record. The system processes the records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload table in ascending sequence number order. Numeric, 9 positions.
Customer Price Group	Required. The code for the customer price group associated with the item/SKU exclusion. Customer price group codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Price Group table. Updates Customer Price Group in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table. Alphanumeric, 4 positions.
Item	Required. A code for the item you wish to exclude from the customer price group discount. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. Updates Excluded Item in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions.
SKU	Optional. The SKU of the item you wish to exclude from the customer price group discount. If the item contains SKUs and you leave this field blank, all SKUs of the item are excluded from the customer price group discount. If the item contains SKUs and you specify a SKU in this field, only the SKU specified is excluded from the customer price group discount. SKU codes are defined in and validated against the SKU table. Updates Excluded SKU in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table. Alphanumeric, 14 positions.
Error Description	Updated by the system during the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process. The reason why the Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload record has been placed in an error status. See Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload Errors. Alphanumeric, 20 positions.
Processed	Updated by the system during the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process. The status of the Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload record. Valid values: Blank = The Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload record has not yet been processed. P = The Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload record has processed successfully. The system removes these records at the end of the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process. E = The Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload record contains errors. See Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload Errors. Alphanumeric, 1 position.

CPGIXUP Customer Price Group Item Exclusion Upload Periodic Function

Use the CPGIXUP periodic function to submit the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Process based on the contents of the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table.

Option	Setting
Function:	CPGIXUP
Description:	CPG ITEM EXCLUSION UPLOAD
Program name:	PFRCPGEXUP
Company	The Company flag must be selected. The Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload process creates, updates, and deletes records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table based on the records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table using the company you entered when you submitted the CPGIXUP periodic function.

The CPGIXUP periodic function is delivered with the system; use the Working with Periodic Functions (WPER) menu option to review it.
Use the Working with Periodic Processes (WPPR) menu option to assign the UPCSTPG and CPGIXUP periodic functions to a periodic process.
Once you have created the periodic process, you can use the Execute Periodic Process screen (located in the Working with Periodic Processes (WPPR) or Executing Periodic Processes (EPRO)) to define a schedule for the job. See Defining the Job Schedule.

For more information: See Scheduling Jobs for more information on How to Schedule a Job.

Customer Price Group Exclusion Upload Errors

The system includes records in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion Upload Table that are in error on the CPG Item/SKU Exclusions Upload Error Records Report.

Error	Reason
Invalid Company	The Company is missing, invalid, or inactive.
Invalid Cust Prc Grp	The Customer Price Group is missing or invalid.
Invalid Item	The Item is missing or invalid.
Invalid SKU	The SKU is not valid for the specified item.

Customer Price Group Pricing

Customer price group pricing allows you to price the items on an order based on the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order. The system determines the initial price of the item based on the Price type assigned to the customer price group and applies any qualifying discounts to the order during line-level pricing and end-of-order pricing.

In this topic:

Customer Price Group Pricing Setup

Before you can use the customer price group pricing method, you must complete the necessary setup.

Menu Options for Customer Price Group Pricing

Menu Option	Description
Working with Customer Price Groups (WCPG)	Create customer price groups to assign to sold to customers. For each customer price group: Use the Price Type field to define the price the system uses as the initial price of an item during customer price group line level pricing. Original = Use the Orig retail $ (Original retail price) field in the SKU table as the initial price. Regular = Use the List price field in the SKU table as the initial price. Optionally, use the Discount field at the customer price group level or customer price group detail level to define a percent discount to prorate across the items on an order for a sold to customer assigned to this customer price group. Optionally, select the Best Price Comparison field to have the system perform customer price group best price comparison logic for the customer price group during end-of-order pricing and repricing. Customer price group best price comparison determines if the price available for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is a better price than the price available for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer. Whichever customer price group provides the best price, the system applies this price to the item on the order. Optionally, use the Work with Customer Price Group Exclusions Screen to define the items/SKUs that are not eligible for the customer price group discount applied to the order during customer price group pricing.
Creating and Updating Sold-to Customers (WCST)	Use the Price group field to assign sold to customers to a customer price group. Note: You can also pass the price group code in the Inbound Order XML Message (CWORDERIN) or the Inbound Customer Message (CWCustomerIn). When you assign the customer price group through the order API, the new order is eligible for any pricing or promotions associated with the price group. If you create an order for a customer that is not assigned to a customer price group, or is assigned to an invalid customer price group code, the system assigns the customer price group code defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value to the customer. For more information see the Order Administration Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2953017.1).
Creating and Working with Items (MITM)	For each item/SKU: Define the Original price of the item. non-SKUed item: Use the Orig retail $ field on the Create Item (Base Information) Screen. SKUed item: Use the Orig retail $ field on the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen. Define the Regular price of the item. non-SKUed item: Use the List price field on the Create Item (Base Information) Screen. SKUed item: Use the List price field on the Create SKU 1 of 2 (With Overrides) Screen. Select the Discountable field on the Create Item Screen if the item is eligible for customer price group discounts. Assign the item/SKU to an offer in order to assign the item/SKU to a price code using the Assigning Price Codes (APCD) menu option.
Working with Price Codes (WPCD)	Create price codes to offer a special price or discount for an item or group of items. Optionally, use the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen to define the sold to customers and customer price groups that qualify for the price code. Note: If you do not define any sold to customers or customer price groups for a price code, then ALL sold to customers and customer price groups qualify for the price code. Note: Order lines that are assigned to a price code do not qualify for the discount defined for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order. To apply the customer price group discount to order lines that are assigned to a price code, embed the customer price group discount in the price defined for the price code. Example: If the customer price group provides a 30% discount, create the price code discount so that it includes the 30% discount.
Assigning Price Codes (APCD)	Define which items are eligible for the special price or discount specified in a price code. You can assign the item to one or more price codes by offer or source code.
Establishing Price Override Reason Codes (WPOR)	Create the price override reason code to assign to order lines that are priced using a customer price group price and cannot be further discounted. However, you can still apply an order-level coupon to these order lines.
Working with Source Codes (WSRC)	To perform End of Order Customer Price Group Pricing during repricing, the Price method field for the source code on the order header must be set to Reg Plus Reprice.
Working with Promotions (WPRO)	Create promotions to apply a further discount to eligible order lines.

System Control Values for Customer Price Group Pricing

Entity level override: You can set up pricing value overrides for an entity that should use different pricing logic from your company-wide standard. In order entry, the system checks the entity associated with the source code on the order header to determine if entity-level pricing overrides are in effect. However, if you enter a customer price group in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value, entity-level pricing overrides are NOT in effect. The system always uses the customer price group pricing method, regardless of the pricing values defined at the entity level.

System Control Value

Description

Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58)

Enter a customer price group code if you wish to use customer price group pricing. The system uses this customer price group:

As the default customer price group to apply to an order when the sold to customer on the order is not assigned to a customer price group.
During customer price group best price comparison to determine if the price available for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is a better price than the price available for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer. Whichever customer price group provides the best price, the system applies this price to the item on the order.

Note:

If you enter a customer price group code in this system control value:

the system uses only customer price group pricing to perform line-level pricing. The system does NOT use the pricing hierarchy to search for a price for an item and does not perform best way pricing based on the setting of the Best Way Pricing (A78) system control value.
you must select the Price Codes (D93) system control value to perform end-of-order pricing and you cannot select any other type of end-of-order pricing method.

Price Override Reason Code for CPG Pricing (L59)

Enter the price override reason code to assign to order lines that are priced using a customer price group price and cannot be further discounted. However, you can still apply an order-level coupon to these order lines.

Line Level Customer Price Group Pricing

The system uses the following steps when you add an item to an order and the system uses customer price group line-level pricing to calculate the price of the order line.

Determine the Customer Price Group

Determine the Customer Price Group to Use

The system uses the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order. If a customer price group code is not assigned to the sold to customer on the order, or if it is invalid, the system uses the customer price group code defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.

Determine the Initial Price of the Item

If a price override reason code is defined for the order line, the system does not price the item using customer price group pricing, and instead, uses the price defined for the order line.

If a price override reason code is not defined for the order line, the system looks at the Price Type defined for the customer price group to determine the initial price of the item.

Original = Original Price. The system uses the price defined in the Orig retail $ (Original Retail Price) field in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.
Regular = Regular Price. The system uses the price defined in the List price field in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.

If an initial price is not found for the item: If the system cannot determine the initial price for the item (an Original retail price or List price was not defined for the item), the system displays an error message in interactive order entry: Price Not Found.

Determine the Customer Price Group Discount

Item eligible for discount? An item is NOT eligible for customer price group discounting if:

The Discountable field for the item is unselected.
The item/SKU is excluded from the customer price group discount. These items display on the Work with Customer Price Group Exclusions Screen and exist in the Customer Price Group SKU Exclusion table.

If the Discountable field for the item is selected and the item/SKU is not excluded from the customer price group discount, the system will apply qualifying discounts and promotions to the item.

Customer price group discount hierarchy: The system determines if a discount exists for the customer price group on the order. The system uses the following hierarchy to determine the customer price group discount.

Use the discount defined in the Customer Price Group Detail table with an effective date that is equal to or earlier than the current date. If more than one Customer Price Group Detail record exists with a qualifying effective date, the system uses the discount with the most current effective date. You can review these discounts on the Work with Customer Price Group Details Screen.
If a discount is not defined in the Customer Price Group Detail table with a qualifying effective date, use the discount defined in the Customer Price Group table. You can review this discount on the Work with Customer Price Groups Screen.
If a discount is not defined in the Customer Price Group table, do not apply a customer price group discount to the order.

Customer price group discount calculation: Original or Regular Price - Customer Price Group Discount % = Updated Order Line Price

Compare List Price to Order Line Price

The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

If the list price is lower than the order line price, the system applies the list price to the order line.
If the list price is equal to or greater than the order line price, the system retains the order line price.

Display Order Detail: If the list price was lower than the order line price, the system displays a message on the Display Order Detail Screen (Reviewing Order Line Detail) in Order Inquiry: LIST PRICE < ORIGINAL RETAIL $ PRICE.

Calculate Order Header Discounts

The system applies any qualifying order header discounts to the order, such as:

The discount defined in the Disc % field on the Work with Order Screen.
The discount defined for the source code on the Work with Order Screen. Use the Discount % field on the Create Source Code Screen (1 of 2) to define a source discount.

Discount calculation messages: If the calculated order line price is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you add the item to the order, indicating the order line number of the discounted item, the offer price (this is initial price of the item), the actual price (this is the discounted price the customer is paying), the dollar amount of the discount, and the discount percentage. For example, if the initial price is $10.00 and the order line price is $5.00, the discount calculation message displays as: Line 1: Offer = 10.00 Actual = 5.00 Discount = 5.00: 50.00%.

Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order

After calculating any Order Header discounts for the order, the system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order.

The system updates the following fields in the Order Detail table during customer price group line level pricing.

Field	Order Detail Update
ODT Offer Price	The initial price of the item, based on the Price type defined for the customer price group. If Price type is Original, this is the Original Retail Price from the SKU table. If Price type is Regular, this is the List Price from the SKU table. You can use this field to determine the initial price of the order line before the system applied any discounts or promotions to the order line.
ODT Original Price	The List price defined for the item/SKU in the SKU table.
ODT Pre-Discount Price	The price of the item after applying the customer price group discount and order header discount. This is the initial price - the customer price group and order header discount; however, if the list price is lower than this price, this is the list price of the item.
ODT Price	The final calculated price of the item after applying the customer price group discount and order header discount. This is the initial price - the customer price group and order header discount; however, if the list price is lower than this price, this is the list price of the item. Note: The final price of the order line may update during Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing.
Price Method	The method the system used to calculate the price of an item, but before applying an order-level discount, such as a source code discount percentage. F `Customer Price Group` displays for lines priced using Customer Price Group Line Level pricing; see the Order Pricing Window for a complete list of price methods. The system uses this value to display the Pricing method on the Work with Order Line Screen (Changing/Adding an Item).

Important:

The system may reprice the order line during Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing and Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison. The system performs price code pricing and best price comparison during repricing and end-of-order pricing.

Examples: Line Level Customer Price Group Pricing

Example: Original Customer Price Group Line Pricing

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use A customer assigned to customer price group CPGO places an order.

2. Determine the Initial Price of the Item The Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, indicating the system uses the Original retail price in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 20.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 15.00 as the initial price of the item.

3. Determine the Customer Price Group Discount. The Discountable flag for items ITO and ITR is selected, indicating the items are eligible for customer price group discounting, however, a discount is not defined for customer price group CPGO, so a customer price group discount is not applied to the order.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price. The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $20.00. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $20.00 as the order line price.
The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $15.00. Since the order line price is greater than the list price, the system updates the order line price to $10.00.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts. the order does not qualify for any Order Header discounts.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to OrderThe system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order:

The order line price for item ITO is $20.00
The order line price for item ITR is $10.00.

Because the calculated order line price for item ITR is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you add the item to the order: Line 2:Offer = 15.00 Actual = 10.00 Discount = 5.00 :33.33%

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 20.00	Price after discounts: 10.00
ODT Price	Order line price: 20.00	Order line price: 10.00
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group.	F = Customer Price Group.

Example: Regular Customer Price Group Line Pricing

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use .A customer assigned to customer price group CPGR places an order.

2. Determine the Initial Price of the Item The Price type for customer price group CPGR is set to Regular, indicating the system uses the List price in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGR is set to Regular, the system uses 25.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGR is set to Regular, the system uses 10.00 as the initial price of the item.

3. Determine the Customer Price Group Discount The Discountable flag for items ITO and ITR is selected, indicating the items are eligible for customer price group discounting, however, a discount is not defined for customer price group CPGO, so a customer price group discount is not applied to the order.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $25.00. Since the order line price is equal to the list price, the system retains $25.00 as the order line price.
The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $10.00. Since the order line price is equal to the list price, the system retains $10.00 as the order line price.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts The order does not qualify for any Order Header discounts.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order The system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order:

The order line price for item ITO is $25.00
The order line price for item ITR is $10.00.

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 25.00	Initial price: 10.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 25.00	Price after discounts: 10.00
ODT Price	Order line price: 25.00	Order line price: 10.00
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group.	F = Customer Price Group.

Example: Customer Price Group Line Pricing With Customer Price Group Discount

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use A customer assigned to customer price group CPGO places an order.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 20.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 15.00 as the initial price of the item.

3. Determine the Customer Price Group Discount The Discountable flag for items ITO and ITR is selected, indicating the items are eligible for customer price group discounting. Customer price group CPGO has the following discounts defined:

10.00% discount at the Customer Price Group Detail level with an effective date of 1/16/12.
30.00% discount at the Customer Price Group Detail level with an effective date of 2/14/12.
5.00% discount at the Customer Price Group level.

Because the current date is 2/15/12, the system applies the 30.00% discount to the order.

Item ITO: initial price $20.00 - 30.00% = $14.00.
Item ITR: initial price $15.00 - 30.00% = $10.50.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $14.00. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $14.00 as the order line price.
The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $10.50. Since the order line price is greater than the list price, the system updates the order line price to $10.00.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts The order does not qualify for any Order Header discounts.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order The system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order:

Because the calculated order line price for item ITO is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you add the item to the order: Line 2:Offer = 20.00 Actual = 14.00 Discount = 6.00 :30.00%

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 14.00	Price after discounts: 10.00
ODT Price	Order line price: 14.00	Order line price: 10.00
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group.	F = Customer Price Group.

Example: Customer Price Group Line Pricing with Order Header Discount

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use A customer assigned to customer price group CPGO places an order.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 20.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 15.00 as the initial price of the item.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $20.00. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $20.00 as the order line price.
The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $15.00. Since the order line price is greater than the list price, the system updates the order line price to $10.00.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts The order qualifies for a 25% source discount.

The system applies the 25% source discount to the order.

Item ITO: current order line price $20.00 - 25.00% = $15.00.
Item ITR: current order line price $10.00 - 25.00% = $7.50.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order The system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order:

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 15.00	Price after discounts: 7.50
ODT Price	Order line price: 15.00	Order line price: 7.50
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group.	F = Customer Price Group.

Example: Customer Price Group Line Pricing with Customer Price Group and Order Header Discount

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use A customer assigned to customer price group CPGO places an order.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 20.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 15.00 as the initial price of the item.

10.00% discount at the Customer Price Group Detail level with an effective date of 1/16/12.
30.00% discount at the Customer Price Group Detail level with an effective date of 2/14/12.
5.00% discount at the Customer Price Group level.

Because the current date is 2/15/12, the system applies the 30.00% discount to the order.

Item ITO: initial price $20.00 - 30.00% = $14.00.
Item ITR: initial price $15.00 - 30.00% = $10.50.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $14.00. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $14.00 as the order line price.
The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $10.50. Since the order line price is greater than the list price, the system updates the order line price to $10.00.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts The order qualifies for a 25% source discount.

The system applies the 25% source discount to the order.

Item ITO: current order line price $14.00 - 25.00% = $10.50.
Item ITR: current order line price $10.00 - 25.00% = $7.50.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order The system applies the final customer price group price to the lines on the order:

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 10.50	Price after discounts: 7.50
ODT Price	Order line price: 10.50	Order line price: 7.50
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group.	F = Customer Price Group.

Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing

If a customer price group is defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value and the Price Codes (D93) system control value is selected, the system reevaluates the entire order during repricing to find the best price code price to apply to each qualifying order line.

See When Repricing Occurs for more information on when repricing occurs during interactive order entry.

Source code setting: To do end of order customer price group pricing, the Price method field for the source code on the order header must be set to Reg Plus Reprice.

Note:

If the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value does not contain a customer price group code, the system performs Regular Price Code Pricing instead of Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing.

The system performs the following steps during customer price group price code pricing.

Important:

Order lines that are assigned to a price code do not qualify for the discount defined for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order. To apply the customer price group discount to order lines that are assigned to a price code, embed the customer price group discount in the price defined for the price code. Example: If the customer price group provides a 30% discount, create the price code discount so that it includes the 30% discount.

Determine Whether the Order Qualifies for a Price Code

To qualify for a price code:

#	Step
1.	The date on the Order Header must fall within the Start date and End date defined for the price code in the Price Code table. You can review the start and end dates for price codes on the Work with Price Codes Screen.
2.	The sold to customer on the order must be defined for the price code in the Price Code Customer table. You can review the customers and customer price groups that qualify for a price code on the Work with Qualifying Customer/Price Groups Screen. Note: If you do not define any sold to customers or customer price groups for a price code, then ALL sold to customers and customer price groups qualify for the price code.
3.	The items on the order must be assigned to the price code and meet the price code requirements. Which items are assigned to the price code? The system looks at the Price Code Details table to determine which items on the order are assigned to the price code. When assigning an item to a price code, you assign the item to the price code by offer or source code. The system uses the source code on the order header to determine whether the item on the order qualifies for the price code. If the item contains SKUs and a SKU is not defined in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code. If the item contains SKUs and a SKU is defined in the Price Code Details table, only the specified SKUs qualify for the price code.
	Price code requirements: The system looks at the Price Code table to determine if the items on the order that are assigned to the price code meet the price code requirements. Quantity required: The total quantity the customer must order of all qualifying items to get the price break. Note: The system evaluates price code quantity by ship-to address. Allow multiples? Unselected = Once an order qualifies for the price code based on the price code quantity requirement, the system applies the price code discount to all qualifying items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code. Selected = Once an order qualifies for the price code based on the price code quantity requirement, the remaining items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify for the price code. The Distinct By setting defines how the system determines whether the order meets the price code multiple requirement. Distinct By: Blank = The order must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three items/SKUs defined for the price code in order to qualify. If the order contains 7 items that qualify, the system applies the price code to 6 of the items. Item = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate items in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate items defined for the price code in order to qualify. SKU = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate SKUs in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate SKUs defined for the price code in order to qualify. Category = The quantity requirement for the price code requires separate item categories in order to qualify. Example: If the Quantity required is 3, the order must contain three separate item categories for the items defined for the price code in order to qualify. See Examples: Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing for examples of how price codes are applied to an order based on the price code requirements.

Apply the Price Code to the Order

You can apply only one price code to an order line.

Best way price code hierarchy: If an order qualifies for more than one price code and you are using Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing, the system calculates the discount that each price code provides and:

Applies the price code that provides the greatest discount to the qualifying items on the order.
If more than one price code offers the same discount, the system uses the price code with the lowest Sequence number.
If more than one price code has the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest numeric price code.

The system applies the price code to the lines on an order in ascending price, order line number sequence.

Once you apply a price code to an order line, it no longer qualifies for another price code.

Starting price: When calculating the price code discount, the system starts with the initial price defined for the order line. This is the price of the item determined during Line Level Customer Price Group Pricing and stored in the ODT Price field.

After the system applies the first price code to the order, the system reevaluates the order to determine if it qualifies for another price code. The system applies the next price code that provides the greatest discount to the order in ascending price, order line number sequence.

The system continues to apply price codes to the order, using the best way price code hierarchy, in ascending price, order line number sequence, until all of the eligible lines on the order are assigned to a price code.

Note:

Price method: The system updates the Price method for any order line whose price was updated during customer price group price code pricing to E Price Code.

Order lines not eligible for price code discounts:

Price code repricing does not apply to manually priced order lines associated with a price override reason code.
Order lines that are assigned to the price override reason code defined in the Price Override Reason Code for CPG Pricing (L59) system control value cannot be further discounted except by order-level coupons or source% discounts. However, the system includes the dollar amount and quantity for order lines assigned to the Customer Price Group price override reason code in the eligibility calculations as qualifiers for promotions and price code pricing that may apply to other items on the order.

Apply Discounts and Promotions to the Order

Discounts and promotions: Once the system completes customer price group price code pricing, the system applies any non-freight discounts, detail-level coupon promotions, and any other promotions to the lines on the order.

Determining the best price: If the Best Price Comparison field for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer is selected, the system performs Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison to determine if the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value provides a better price than the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order.

Order-level coupon promotions: When using customer price group pricing, the system applies order-level coupon promotions, as defined in Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR), as the last discount applied to the lines on the order. See Order-Level Coupon Promotions when using Customer Price Group Pricing for further details.

Examples: Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing

Example: Price Code Special Price Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
303	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 303 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
303	C1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	none	Price remains $10.00
2	B1	$20.00	none	Price remains $20.00
3	C1	$30.00	303	Special price: $20.00 each for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Example: Price Code Dollar Off Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
101	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 101 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
101	A1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	101	Dollar off: $2.00 off 1 Price changes from $10.00 to $8.00
2	B1	$20.00	none	Price remains $20.00
3	C1	$30.00	none	Price remains $30.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Example: Price Code Percent Off Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	4	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
202	10

Determine price code item assignment: The item on the order that qualifies for price code 202 in the Price Code Details table is:

Price Code	Item	SKU	Source Code
202	B1		7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	none	Price remains $10.00
2	B1	$20.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $20.00 to 18.00
3	C1	$30.00	none	Price remains $30.00
4	D1	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

Because the calculated order line price for item A1 is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 2:Offer = 20.00 Actual = 18.00 Discount = 2.00 :10.00%

Example: Price Code Group Price Discount

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Quantity	Price
1	SKA	RED	1	$40.00
2	SKB	BLUE	1	$20.00
3	SKC	GRN	1	$30.00
4	SKD	GREY	1	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price code in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The items on the order that qualify for price code 404 in the Price Code Details table are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7

Note:

If an item contains SKUs and no SKUs are defined for the item in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code.

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices in ascending price, order line number sequence

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
2	SKB	BLUE	$20.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $20.00 to $13.33
3	SKC	GRN	$30.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
1	SKA	RED	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $26.67
4	SKD	GREY	$40.00	none	Price remains $40.00

merchandise total for lines assigned to price code 404 = $90.00

$90.00 merchandise total - $60.00 group price = $30.00 discount amount to prorate

Note:

Prorating the Group Price

The system applies the group price discount to each qualifying order line on a pro-rata basis.

Order line 2 calculations:

20.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .2222 discount percentage

20.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .2222 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 13.33 unit selling price

Order line 3:

30.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .3333 discount percentage

30.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .3333 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 20.00 unit selling price

Order line 1:

40.00 extended amount of the detail line before applying discounts / 90.00 discountable order merchandise total = .4444 discount percentage

40.00 pre-discount unit price of the detail line - [(30.00 total discount amount to prorate * .4444 discount percentage from above calculation) / 1 line unit quantity] = 26.67 unit selling price

Example: Applying Multiple Price Codes to the Order

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	Quantity	Price
1	A1	1	$10.00
2	B1	2	$20.00
3	C1	3	$30.00
4	D1	3	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
303	2	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Special price: $20.00 each for 3
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price codes in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#
101	10
202	10
303	10
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	A1	7
202	B1	7
303	C1	7
404	D1	7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices as follows:

Line#	Item	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
1	A1	$10.00	101	Dollar off: $2 off 1 Price changes from $10.00 to $8.00
2	B1	$20.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $20.00 to 18.00
3	C1	$30.00	303	Special price: $20.00 each for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
4	D1	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $20.00

Example: Item Qualifies for More than One Price Code

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Quantity	Price
1	SKA	RED	1	$40.00
2	SKA	BLUE	1	$40.00
3	SKB	GRN	1	$20.00
4	SKC	GREY	1	$30.00
5	SKD	BLCK	1	$40.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2
404	1	2/1/12	4/1/12	3	Group price: $60.00 total for 3

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order qualifies for the following price codes in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#
101	10
202	10
404	10

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	SKA	7
101	SKB	7
101	SKC	7
101	SKD	7
202	SKA	7
202	SKB	7
202	SKC	7
202	SKD	7
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7

Note:

If an item contains SKUs and no SKUs are defined for the item in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code.

Important:

You can apply only one price code to an order line. If an order line qualifies for more than one price code and you are using Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing, the system uses the price code that provides the greatest discount. If more than one price code offers the same discount, the system uses the price code with the lowest Sequence number. If more than one price code has the same sequence number, the system uses the price code with the lowest numeric price code.

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices the lines on the order in ascending price, order line number sequence.

Of the price codes that were eligible to apply to the order, price code 404 provided the greatest discount. Because the Multiples field for price code 404 was selected, only the first 3 order lines in ascending price, order line number sequence were eligible for the price code; the remaining order lines did not meet the quantity requirement for price code 404. The system assigned the next price code with the greatest discount (price code 202) to the two remaining items on the order.

The system applies price code 404 to order lines 3, 4 and 1. See Prorating the Group Price for the calculations the system uses to determine the price of each order line assigned to the group price.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
3	SKB	GRN	$20.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $20.00 to $13.33
4	SKC	GREY	$30.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $30.00 to $20.00
1	SKA	RED	$40.00	404	Group price: $60.00 total for 3 Price changes from $40.00 to $26.67
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 5:
2	SKA	BLUE	$40.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $40.00 to 36.00
5	SKD	BLCK	$40.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $40.00 to 36.00

Discount message: Because the calculated order line price for the order lines is lower than the initial price of the item, the system displays Discount Calculation Messages when you reprice the order: Line 4:Offer = 30.00 Actual = 20.00 Discount = 10.00 :33.33%

Example: Price Code Multiples and Distinct By

On 2/17/12, you take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7.

Line#	Item	SKU	Item Category	Qty	Price
1	SKA	SML	A	1	$10.00
2	SKA	SML	A	1	$10.00
3	SKB	SML	B	1	$10.00
4	SKC	SML	C	1	$10.00
5	SKD	SML	D	1	$10.00
6	SKD	MED	D	1	$10.00
7	SKD	LRG	D	1	$10.00

Determine eligible price codes: The order and customer qualify for price code 202 in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Price Code Discount
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
202	SKA	7
202	SKB	7
202	SKC	7
202	SKD	7

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system reprices the lines on the order in ascending price, order line number sequence.

Multiples Unselected

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 2:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Now that the order qualifies for price code 202, the system applies price code 202 to all qualifying items on the order that are not already assigned to a price code:
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Blank

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is blank, the order must meet the price code quantity requirement again in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 2:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 3 and 4:
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 5 and 6:
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order line 7 does not qualify since it does not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2.
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Item

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is Item, the price code requires separate items in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 3:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 4:
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order lines 5, 6 and 7 do not qualify for price code 202 since they do not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by item.
5	SD	SML	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By SKU

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is SKU, the price code requires separate SKUs in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line#	Item	SKU	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
					The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 3:
1	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 4:
2	SA	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 5 and 6:
5	SD	SML	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
6	SD	MED	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
					Order line 7 does not qualify since it does not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by SKU.
7	SD	LRG	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00

Multiples Selected, Distinct By Item Category

Because Multiples for price code 202 is selected and the Distinct By is Item Category, the price code requires separate item categories in the required quantity in order to qualify.

Line	Item	SKU	Category	Initial Price	Price Code	Reprice
						The system applies price code 202 to order lines 1 and 3:
1	SA	SML	A	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
3	SB	SML	B	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
						The system then applies price code 202 to order lines 2 and 4:
2	SA	SML	A	$10.00	none	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
4	SC	SML	C	$10.00	202	Percent off: 10% off 2 Price changes from $10.00 to $9.00
						Order lines 5, 6 and 7 do not qualify for price code 202 since they do not meet the price code quantity requirement of 2 by item category.
5	SD	SML	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
6	SD	MED	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00
7	SD	LRG	D	$10.00	none	Remains $10.00

Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison

After performing Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing and applying any non-freight discounts and promotions (and before applying any freight promotions and order-level coupon promotions), the system looks at the Best Price Comparison field for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer to determine whether to perform customer price group best price comparison processing.

Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison determines if the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value provides a better price than the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order.

If the Best Price Comparison field for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer is unselected, the system does not perform customer price group best price comparison.
If the Best Price Comparison field for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer is selected, the system performs customer price group best price comparison.

During customer price group best price comparison, the system:

Performs Line Level Customer Price Group Pricing for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.
Performs Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.
Calculates the non-freight discounts, line-level coupon promotions, and any other promotions that are eligible for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.
Compares the price available for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value to the price available for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order.
If the calculated price for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is lower than the calculated price for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order, the system updates the order line to this lower price.
If the calculated price for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is greater than the calculated price for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order, the system does not update the price on the order line.
After applying the best price to each order line, the system applies any freight discounts and order-level coupon promotions to the order; see Order-Level Coupon Promotions when using Customer Price Group Pricing.

Manually entered promotions: If the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is eligible for a promotion that requires manual entry to be applied to the order, the system includes this promotion in the best price comparison only if the promotion code is manually entered on the order.

Free gifts:

If the sold to customer or order qualifies for a free gift, and after performing best price comparison, the dollar total no longer makes the order qualify, the system will not remove the free gift from the order.
If the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value qualifies for a free gift, the system will NOT add the item to the order during customer price group best price comparison.

Price method: The system updates the Price method for any order line whose price was updated during customer price group best price comparison to J Repriced Customer Price Group Best Price.

Order transaction history: The system writes an order transaction history message indicating the order line was repriced during customer price group best price comparison; for example:.

Type	Transaction Note	Amount	User
UPSELL PROMO	Best Price price override - Line 2	24.99	TBROWN

Order Detail table: The system stores the calculated price for the default customer price group in the following fields in the Order Detail table.

Basic customer price
Basic customer prediscount price
Basic customer original price: The final calculated price of the order line for the customer price group code defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.
Customer price group original price: The final calculated price of the order line for the customer price group code assigned to the sold to customer on the order.
Basic customer price method

The system compares the Basic customer original price to the Customer price group original price to determine whether the default customer price group provides a better price than the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order.

Order-Level Coupon Promotions when using Customer Price Group Pricing

When using customer price group pricing, the system applies order-level coupon promotions, as defined in Working with Coupon Promotions (WCPR), as the last discount applied to the lines on the order.

The system applies order-level coupon promotions after applying all other discounts and promotions to the lines on the order, and after performing Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison.
When applying order-level coupon promotions to the lines on the order, the system applies the coupons to the order as a pro-rated merchandise discount during repricing.
The system applies the coupon promotion to all lines eligible for the coupon promotion, including non-discountable items.

Customer price group order-level coupon discount calculations: The system uses the following calculations to determine the discount amount to apply to each order line.

The system calculates the Discount Percentage for each order line:

order line extended amount after applying all other discounts and promotions and best price / order merchandise total = discount percentage

The system calculates the Unit Selling Price for each order line:

order line post-discount unit price - [(total order-level coupon amount X discount % from above calculation) / line unit quantity] = unit selling price

For more information: See:

How Coupons Work for more information on coupon promotions.
Example: Line Level Best Price Comparison and Example: Price Code Best Price Comparison for examples that apply order-level coupons to an order.

Examples: Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison

Example: Line Level Best Price Comparison

1. Determine the Customer Price Group to Use. A customer assigned to customer price group CPGO places an order. The Best Price Comparison field for customer price group CPGO is selected, indicating the system uses the best price offered between customer price group CPGO and the default customer price group, CPG, defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value.

2. Determine the Initial Price of the Item

The Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, indicating the system uses the Original retail price in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.
The Price type for customer price group CPG is set to Regular, indicating the system uses the List price in the SKU table as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITO to the order. Item ITO has the following prices defined:

List price of $25.00
Original retail price of $20.00

CPGO customer price group	CPG customer price group
Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 20.00 as the initial price of the item.	Since the Price type for customer price group CPG is set to Regular, the system uses $25.00 as the initial price of the item.

The customer adds item ITR to the order. Item ITR has the following prices defined:

List price of $10.00
Original retail price of $15.00

CPGO customer price group	CPG customer price group
Since the Price type for customer price group CPGO is set to Original, the system uses 15.00 as the initial price of the item.	Since the Price type for customer price group CPG is set to Regular, the system uses $10.00 as the initial price of the item.

3. Determine the Customer Price Group Discount. The Discountable flag for items ITO and ITR is selected, indicating the items are eligible for customer price group discounting.

CPGO customer price group

CPG customer price group

Customer price group CPGO provides a 30.00% discount.

Item ITO: initial price $20.00 - 30.00% = $14.00.

Item ITR: initial price $15.00 - 30.00% = $10.50.

Customer price group CPG provides a 25.00% discount.

Item ITO: initial price $25.00 - 25.00% = $18.75.

Item ITR: initial price $10.00 - 25.00% = $7.50.

4. Compare List Price to Order Line Price. The system compares the list price defined for the item to the order line price.

CPGO customer price group

CPG customer price group

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $14.00. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $14.00 as the order line price.

The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $10.50. Since the order line price is greater than the list price, the system updates the order line price to $10.00.

The list price for item ITO is $25.00 and the order line price is $18.75. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $18.75 as the order line price.

The list price for item ITR is $10.00 and the order line price is $7.50. Since the order line price is lower than the list price, the system retains $7.50 as the order line price.

5. Calculate Order Header Discounts. The order qualifies for a 25% source discount.

The system applies the 25% source discount to the order.

CPGO customer price group

CPG customer price group

Item ITO: current order line price $14.00 - 25.00% = $10.50.

Item ITR: current order line price $10.00 - 25.00% = $7.50.

Item ITO: current order line price $18.75 - 25.00% = $14.06.

Item ITR: current order line price $7.50 - 25.00% = $5.62.

6. Apply Final Customer Price Group Price to Order. The system applies the final customer price group price for the customer price group CPGO assigned to the sold to customer to the lines on the order:

Note:

Before you reprice the order, the final calculated line level price for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order displays for each order line. The system does not apply the best price to the each order line until you reprice the order.

The system updates the Order Detail table with the customer price group line level price.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price after discounts: 10.50	Price after discounts: 7.50
ODT Price	Order line price: 10.50	Order line price: 7.50
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group	F = Customer Price Group
Basic Customer Price	default customer price group price after discounts: 14.06	default customer price group price after discounts: 5.62
Basic Customer Prediscount Price	14.06	5.62
Basic Customer Original Price	final default customer price group price: 14.06	final default customer price group price: 5.62
Customer Price Group Original Price	final sold to customer price group discount: 10.50	final sold to customer price group discount: 7.50

When you select Reprice, the system:

applies any non-freight discounts, detail-level coupon promotions, and any other promotions to the lines on the order. The offer associated with the order has a free gift defined for a merchandise total of $18.00. Because the merchandise total for the order before performing best price comparison is $18.00 ($10.50 + $7.50), the system adds the free gift to the order.
compares the prices offered by the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order to the prices offered by the default customer price group and updates the lines on the order to the lowest price offered.

CPGO customer price group

CPG customer price group

Item ITO: final calculated price is $10.50.

Item ITR: final calculated price is $7.50.

Item ITO: final calculated price is $14.06.

Item ITR: final calculated price is $5.62.

Results:

Item ITO: The final price for sold to customer price group CPGO $10.50 is lower than the final price for the default customer price group CPG $14.06. The system retains $10.50 as the final price.
Item ITR: The final price for sold to customer price group CPGO $7.50 is greater than the final price for the default customer price group CPG $5.62. The system updates this order line to $5.62.

8. Apply Order-Level Coupon Promotions to the Order. The order qualifies for an order-level coupon that provides $5.00 off the order.

The system applies the $5.00 order-level coupon discount to each order line on a pro-rata basis. The merchandise total after applying all other discounts and promotions and determining the best price is $16.12 (10.50 + 5.62).

The system uses the following calculations to determine the discount amount to apply to each order line.

The system calculates the Discount Percentage for each order line:

order line extended amount after applying all other discounts and promotions and best price / order merchandise total = discount percentage

Line 1: 10.50 / 16.12 = .65136

Line 2: 5.62 / 16.12 = .3486

The system calculates the Unit Selling Price for each order line:

order line post-discount unit price - [(total order-level coupon amount X discount % from above calculation) / line unit quantity] = unit selling price

Line 1: 10.50 - [(5.00 X .65136) / 1] = $7.24

Line 2: 5.62 - [(5.00 X .3486) / 1] = $3.88

Note:

Even though the merchandise total after performing best price comparison and applying any order-level coupons to the order is now $11.12 (while the offer free gift required a merchandise total of $18.00), the system retains the offer free gift that was added to the order.

Order Detail table updates: The system updates the Order Detail table after repricing the order.

Field	Item ITO	Item ITR
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 20.00	Initial price: 15.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 25.00	List price: 10.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price before reprice: 10.50	Price before reprice: 7.50
ODT Price	Order line price: 7.24	Order line price: 3.88
Price Method	F = Customer Price Group	J = Repriced CPG Best Price
Basic Customer Price	default customer price group price after discounts: 10.49	default customer price group price after discounts: 4.19
Basic Customer Prediscount Price	14.06	5.62
Basic Customer Original Price	default customer price group price before applying order-level coupon: 14.06	default customer price group price before applying order-level coupon: 5.62
Customer Price Group Original Price	sold to customer price group discount before applying order-level coupon: 10.50	sold to customer price group discount before applying order-level coupon: 7.50
Basic Customer Price Method	A = Repriced-prorated discount	F = Customer Price Group

Example: Price Code Best Price Comparison

Determine customer price group: You take an order for sold to customer 10 using source code 7. Sold to customer 10 is assigned to customer price group CPGO. The Best Price Comparison field for customer price group CPGO is selected.

Line#	Item	SKU	Quantity	Price
1	SKA	RED	1	$40.00
2	SKC	BLCK	1	$30.00

Determine eligible price codes: The date on the Order Header falls within the date range for the following price codes in the Price Code table:

Price Code	Seq	Start	End	Qty	Type of Price Code Discount
101	4	2/1/12	4/1/12	1	Dollar off: $2 off 1
202	3	2/1/12	4/1/12	2	Percent off: 10% off 2

Determine price code customer assignment: The sold to customer on the order and the CPG customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value qualify for the following price codes in the Price Code Customer table:

Price Code	Customer#	Customer Price Group
101	10
202		CPG

Determine price code item assignment: The details in the Price Code Details table for the items on the order are:

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	SKA	7
101	SKC	7
202	SKA	7
202	SKC	7

Note:

If an item contains SKUs and no SKUs are defined for the item in the Price Code Details table, all SKUs for the item qualify for the price code.

Reprice the order: When you select Reprice at the Order Detail screen, the system:

applies any non-freight discounts, detail-level coupon promotions, and any other promotions to the lines on the order. The sold to customer qualifies for a free gift with a merchandise total of $65.00. Because the merchandise total for the order before performing best price comparison is $66.00 ($38.00 + $38.00), the system adds the free gift to the order.
determines whether the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value provides a greater discount than the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order:

Line#

Item

Initial Price

Price Code

Default Customer Price Group Price

Sold To Customer Price Group Price

SKA

$40.00

101

Percent off: 10% off 2

Price changes from $40.00 to 36.00

Dollar off: $2 off 2

Price changes from $40.00 to $38.00

SKC

$40.00

202

Percent off: 10% off 2

Price changes from $40.00 to 27.00

Dollar off: $2 off 2

Price changes from $40.00 to $28.00

Results: The price for the customer price group defined in the Customer Price Group Code for CPG Pricing Only (L58) system control value is lower than the price for the customer price group assigned to the sold to customer on the order. Because the price is lower, the system updates the order lines to use the price offered by the default customer price group.

Apply order-level coupons: The order qualifies for an order-level coupon that provides $5.00 off the order.

The system uses the following calculations to determine the discount amount to apply to each order line.

The system calculates the Discount Percentage for each order line:

order line extended amount after applying all other discounts and promotions and best price / order merchandise total = discount percentage

order line 1: 36.00 / 63.00 = .5714

order line 2: 27.00 / 63.00 = .4286

The system calculates the Unit Selling Price for each order line:

order line post-discount unit price - [(total order-level coupon amount X discount % from above calculation) / line unit quantity] = unit selling price

line 1: 36.00 - [(5.00 X .5714) / 1] = $33.14

line 2: 27.00 - [(5.00 X .4286) / 1] = $24.86

Note:

Even though the merchandise total after performing best price comparison and applying any order-level coupons to the order is now $58.00 (while the free gift for the sold to customer required a merchandise total of $60.00), the system retains the free gift that was added to the order.

Order Detail table updates: The system updates the Order Detail table after repricing the order.

Field	Item SKA	Item SKC
ODT Offer Price	Initial price: 40.00	Initial price: 30.00
ODT Original Price	List price: 40.00	List price: 30.00
ODT Pre-Discount Price	Price before reprice: 38.00	Price before reprice: 28.00
ODT Price	Order line price: 33.14	Order line price: 24.86
Price Method	J = Repriced CPG Best Price	J = Repriced CPG Best Price
Basic Customer Price	33.14	24.86
Basic Customer Pre-Discount Price	36.00	27.00
Basic Customer Original Price	36.00	27.00
Customer Price Group Original Price	38.00	28.00
Basic Customer Price Method	E = Price code	E = Price code

Customer Price Group Pricing in Order Maintenance

During order maintenance, the system performs Line Level Customer Price Group Pricing when you add, change, or delete the lines on an order.

The system does NOT perform Customer Price Group Price Code Pricing or Customer Price Group Best Price Comparison during order maintenance. The system displays an error message when you select Reprice: Selected function is not valid for current processing mode (Maintain).

Reviewing Forecasting Information

Topics in this part:

Inventory Status Inquiry (ISIQ) allows you to review the current inventory status and order totals for an item by offer. Generating Forecasting Reports provides descriptions and examples of several reports that help you evaluate sales response for an offer and plan and reorder merchandise.

Using House List Options

Topic in this part:

Working with Merge/Purge Sold-to Names (MMCS) describes how to generate a listing of duplicate records and merge customer sold-to records.
Merging and Purging Customer Bill To Names (MMCB) describes how to merge customer bill-to records.

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	SKA	7
101	SKB	7
101	SKC	7
101	SKD	7
202	SKA	7
202	SKB	7
202	SKC	7
202	SKD	7
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	SKA	7
101	SKB	7
101	SKC	7
101	SKD	7
202	SKA	7
202	SKB	7
202	SKC	7
202	SKD	7
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7

Price Code	Item	Source Code
101	SKA	7
101	SKB	7
101	SKC	7
101	SKD	7
202	SKA	7
202	SKB	7
202	SKC	7
202	SKD	7
404	SKA	7
404	SKB	7
404	SKC	7
404	SKD	7